Japan Radio JSS-2250 Marine MF/HF GMDSS Radio Transceiver, digital selective calling (DSC) / narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) Modem User Manual

MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT

Instruction Manual

7ZPJD0622

.

CAUTIONS AGAINST HIGH VOLTAGE

Radio and radar devices are operated by high voltages of anywhere from a few hundred volts up to

many hundreds of thousands of volts. Although there is no danger with normal use, it is very

dangerous if contact is made with the internal parts of these devices. (Only specialists should attempt

any maintenance, checking or adjusting.)

There is a very high risk of death by even a few thousand volts, in some cases you can be fatally

electrocuted by just a few hundred volts. To prevent accidents, you should avoid contact with the

internal parts of these devices at all costs. If contact is inevitable as in the case of an emergency, you

must switch off the devices and ground a terminal in order to discharge the capacitors. After making

certain that all the electricity is discharged, only then can you insert your hand into the device. Wearing

cotton gloves and putting your left hand in your pocket, in order not to use both hands simultaneously,

are also very good methods of shock prevention.

Quite often, an injury occurs by secondary factors, therefore it is necessary to choose a sturdy and

level working surface. If someone is electrocuted it is necessary to thoroughly disinfect the affected

area and seek medical attention as soon as possible.

When you find an electrocution victim, you must first switch off the machinery and ground all circuits. If

you are unable to cut off the machinery, move the victim away from it using a non-conductive material

such as dry boards or clothing.

When someone is electrocuted, and the electrical current reaches the breathing synapses of the

central nervous system inside the brain, breathing stops. If the victim's condition is stable, he or she

can be administered artificial respiration. An electrocution victim becomes very pale, and their pulse

can be very weak or even stop, consequently losing consciousness and becoming stiff.

Administration of first aid is critical in this situation.

Cautions concerning treatment of

electrocution victims

First aid

☆Note points for first aid

Unless there is impending danger leave the victim where he or she is, then begin artificial respiration.

Once you begin artificial respiration, you must continue without losing rhythm.

(1) Make contact with the victim cautiously, there is a risk that you may get electrocuted.

(2) Switch off the machinery and then move the victim away slowly if you must.

(3) Inform someone immediately (a hospital or doctor, dial emergency numbers, etc.).

(4) Lay the victim on his or her back and loosen any constrictive clothing (a tie, or belt).

(5) (a) Check the victim's pulse.

(b) Check for a heartbeat by pressing your ear against the victim's chest.

(c) Check if the victim is breathing by putting the back of your hand or face near the victim's face.

(d) Check the pupils of the eyes.

(6) Open the victim's mouth and remove any artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum. Leave the

mouth opened and flatten the tongue with a towel or by putting something into the mouth to

prevent the victim's tongue from obstructing the throat. (If he or she is clenching the teeth and it is

difficult to open the mouth, use a spoon or the like to pry open the mouth.)

(7) Continually wipe the mouth to prevent the accumulation of saliva.

☆If the victim has a pulse but is not breathing

(“Mouth to mouth” resuscitation) Figure 1

(1) Place the victim’s head facing backward (place something under the neck like a pillow).

(2) Point the chin upward to widen the trachea.

(3) Pinch the victim’s nose, take a deep breath, then put your mouth over the victim’s mouth and

exhale completely, making sure that your mouth completely covers the victim’s mouth. Then

remove your mouth. Repeat this routine 10 to 15 times per minute (holding the nostrils).

(4) Pay attention to the victim to notice if he or she starts to breath. If breathing returns, stop

resuscitation.

(5) If it is impossible to open the victim’s mouth, put something like a plastic straw or vinyl tube into

one of the nostrils then blow air in while covering the mouth and the other nostril.

(6) Occasionally, when the victim comes back to consciousness, they immediately try to stand up.

Prevent this and keep them in a laying position. Give them something warm to drink and be sure

that they rest (do not give them any alcohol).

Administering artificial respiration by raising the head.

① (1) Raise the back of head, then place one

hand on the forehead and place the other

hand under the neck. →①

Most victims open their mouth when this is

done, making “mouth to mouth”

resuscitation easier.

② (2) Cover the victim’s mouth by opening your

mouth widely, then push your cheek

against the victim’s nose, →②

or pinch the victim’s nose to prevent air

from leaking out of it. →③

③ (3) Completely exhale into the lungs.

Exhale into the lungs until the chest

inflates.

You have to blow as rapidly as possible for

the first 10 times.

“Mouse to mouse” artificial respiration

Figure 1

☆If the victim has no pulse and is not breathing

(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2

If the victim has no pulse, his or her pupils are dilated, and if you cannot detect a heartbeat, the heart

may have stopped, beginning artificial respiration is critical.

(1) Put both hands on the diaphragm, with hands on top of each other keeping both arms straight (If

your elbows are bent, you cannot push with as much power). Press the diaphragm with your body

weight until the chest sinks about 2 cm (about 50 times per minute).

(2) If administering first aid when alone:

Perform the heart massage about 15 times then blow in twice. Repeat this routine.

If administering first aid with two people:

One person performs the heart massage 5 times, and the other person blows air in once. Repeat

this routine (Heart massage and “mouth to mouth” resuscitation used together).

(3) Constantly check the pupils and the pulse, if the pupils become normal and the pulse steadies,

keep them in a laying position and give them something warm to drink, be sure that they rest (do

not give them any alcohol). In any case you have to entrust major decision making to a doctor.

Having understanding people around is essential to the victim’s recovery from the mental shock of

electrocution.

① ②

③ ④

(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2

v

Preface

Thank you for choosing the Model JRC JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) MF/HF radio equipment.

The radio equipment can be used as a Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) radio

device, compliant with international regulations, that provides emergency communications and

standard communications capabilities for small and large ships.

● Please read this instruction manual thoroughly before using the MF/HF radio equipment, and use

it in accordance with the instructions contained herein.

● Please keep this manual available for future reference. Please refer to it if any difficulties are

encountered when using the equipment.

vi

Before operation

Concerning the symbols

This manual uses the following symbols to explain correct operation and to prevent

injury or damage to property.

The symbols and descriptions are as follows. Understand them before proceeding with

this manual.

WARNING Indicates a warning that, if ignored, may result in

serious injury or even death.

CAUTION Indicates a caution that, if ignored, may result in

injury or damage to property.

Examples of symbols

The Δ symbol indicates caution (including DANGER and WARNING).

The illustration inside the Δ symbol specifies the content of the caution

more accurately. (This example warns of possible electrical shock.)

The ; symbol indicates that performing an action is prohibited. The

illustration inside the ; symbol specifies the contents of the prohibited

operation. (In this example disassembly is prohibited.)

The z symbol indicates operations that must be performed. The

illustration inside the z symbol specifies obligatory instructions. (In this

example unplugging is the obligatory instruction.)

Concerning the WARNING labels

The WARNING labels are put on the NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver, NBD-2250/2500

Power supply, NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner, and NBB-714/724 Battery charger.

Do not take off, destroy, or modify the labels.

NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver (Upper view)

vii

NBD-2250/2500 Power supply (Upper view)

NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner

NBB-714/724 Battery charger

viii

Handling precautions

WARNING

Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection or

repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire, electrical

shock, or malfunction.

If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or agents.

Do not disassemble or customize this unit.

Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.

Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment.

Doing so may cause electrical shock, or equipment malfunction.

Do not touch any of the areas with warning labels.

Doing so may cause electrical shock.

Do not use voltage other than that specified.

Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.

Do not remove protective covers on the high voltage terminals.

Doing so may cause electrical shock.

Do not insert anything flammable into the equipment.

Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.

If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in

charge.

Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers on the ship in distress.

This equipment is used for both distress communication and routine communication.

Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine

operation or inspection.

ix

CAUTION

Do not use this equipment anyplace other than specified.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not turn the trimmer resistors or the trimmer capacitors on the PCB unit.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not install the equipment in a place near water or in one with excessive

humidity, steam, dust, or soot.

Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.

Do not test the distress alert.

Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers.

Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention

requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times. Always

listen to 2187.5 kHz, and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following

frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz. In class B

mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz.

When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers

on the power supply.

To operate DSC functions of the equipment, the ID numbers assigned to the ship

must be registered in advance. If registration is necessary, contact our service

center or agents.

To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents.

Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted

and setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to

installing the equipment.

When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or

officer in charge.

If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and

transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And

then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/

in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)

Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and

reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name

and manufacture number/date, if possible.

To turn off an alarm or clear a display such as a received DSC message, do not

press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may cause a false distress alert.

(Press the CANCEL key to turn off the alarm.)

When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may

cause a false distress alert.

(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.)

A distress acknowledgement or a distress relay call can be transmitted using the

option on an active procedure screen, but when sending such a call, follow the

instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge.

x

CAUTION

DSC messages with incorrect format or data may not be received, but it is not a

malfunction. Also if the data terminal is not connected, the equipment does not

receive DSC calls requesting ARQ/FEC communication, regardless of either the

category of routine, safety, urgency or distress.

Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to avoid

accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such messages cannot

be read, it is not a malfunction.

The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power by

such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention

(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn off the

equipment when at sea.

The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is different

from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time when the position

information is valid.

The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position

information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the 7.1

Date & time menu.

When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type.

The batteries, except for sealed lead-acid batteries that require no equalization,

should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six months

The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not

touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure the thermal head is cool before

replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head.

The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following

precautions when using this paper.

・ Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources.

・ Do not rub the paper with any hard objects.

・ Do not place the paper near organic solvents.

・ Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film,

erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time.

・ Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy

paper.

The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not

touch the print head of the printer. Make sure the print head is cool before

replacing the paper or cleaning the print head.

Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper. Do not

twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge.

Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the printer.

Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it back on

again so it can initialize correctly.

Be sure to unmount the USB flash memory before removing it from the NDZ-227

Data terminal at work.

xi

Sending a Distress Alert

CAUTION

When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in

charge.

1

1.

.

Open the DISTRESS key cover on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER.

2

2.

.

Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds to send the distress alert.

When the countdown is finished the screen below on the right is displayed, and after antenna

tuning the distress alerts are transmitted.

3

3.

.

After sending the distress alert, wait for an acknowledgement.

The radiotelephone can be used to communicate even while waiting for an acknowledgement on the screen

below left. When an acknowledgement is received, press the CANCEL key or ENT to cancel the alarm on the

below right screen, and communicate with the station. Unless an acknowledgement is received or the

distress alert is cancelled manually, the equipment repeats the distress alert every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

D

DI

I

IS

S

ST

T

TR

R

RE

E

ES

S

SS

S

A

AL

L

LE

E

ER

R

RT

T

TS

S

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Distress call starts

in sec

4

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz

Distress calling

Next :---

Stage :Waiting for CH free

Call-F: / / / / /

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[Cancel]

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz

Distress calling

Next :Resends 4.1min later

Stage :Waiting for ACK

Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]

Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|OWN D-ACK|2MHz

DIST acknowledged(00.2min)

Tx:2|4|6|8|12|16/Undesignated /TEL

89ﾟ59.0123'N179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

A DST ALT

xii

4

4.

.

After receiving acknowledgement, use the radiotelephone to request rescue.

First, the responding station calls by radiotelephone. Communicate the following information to that station.

z Say "MAYDAY".

z Say "This is (name of your ship)".

z Tell the station the ship's Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number, call sign, ship's position,

nature of distress, and rescue requests.

If time permits, enter the nature of the distress or the mode (Radiotelephone or FEC) as follows,

just before sending the distress alert. (For more details, see 4.5.5 Distress alerts.)

1) Open menu 3. Editing a distress msg.

2) Press ENT on the screen at right and select

the nature of the distress.

3) Press ENT to confirm the selection.

The nature of the distress is set. If the position

and time (UTC) are not displayed automatically

for any reason, input them manually at this time.

4) Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4

seconds to send the distress alert.

The rest of the procedure is the same as

described above.

Terminating a Distress Alert

CAUTION

If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and transmit

the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And then report

the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform

the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)

Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and reason why

the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name and manufacture

number/date, if possible.

Select the Cancel menu and press ENT on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER.

The screen shown below is displayed. Then select Continue with the jog dial and press ENT to start the

distress cancel procedure referring the guidance displayed on the controller.

Note) For more details, see the description in the 4.5.5.1 Quick distress alerts.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx: 4146.0/Tx: 4146.0kHz

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[NE]

[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

Nature

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 2182.0/Tx: 2182.0kHz

Distress calling

Next :Resends 3.2min later

Stage :Waiting for ACK

Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]

[Cancel]

!!Warning!!

Cancel the transmitted

false distress alert?

(TGT: 2/4/6/8/12/16M)

[Continue] [Return]

[Return]

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

xiii

Receiving a Distress Alert

WARNING

If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in charge.

Doing so may save the lives of the crew and passengers on the ship in distress.

1

1.

.

When a distress alert is received, the information such as the ID number of the ship in

distress and the stage of the distress event are displayed.

If the equipment is not used, i.e. there is no active procedure at that time, a distress and safety frequency is

set and the ALM lamp starts blinking, and an alarm gradually grows louder.

2

2.

.

Press the CANCEL key to stop the alarm. If the popup screen is shown, select "Accept"

and press ENT.

After the specified communicate mode and the distress frequency are set, keep watch under such a condition.

Keep watch for five minutes or more, and executes the report to the coast station etc. as appropriate

3

3.

.

To acknowledge to the distress alert after coordination with the coast station, from the

above right screen, press FUNC key to move the active screen to the message control area.

Then select ACK with jog dial and press ENT to send the acknowledgement.

After acknowledging the distress alert, communicate with the ship in distress as follows;

z Say "MAYDAY".

z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times

z Say, "This is".

z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times

z Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY".

TEL

8291.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT

Waiting to send ACK(00.6min)

Multi-FRQ:2/ / /8/ /16

TEL :Rx 8291.0/Tx 8291.0KHz

[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]

A DST ALT

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

A R:DST ALTA R:DST ALT

RxFR:123456789|DISTRESS ALT

Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)

Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz

[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]

SAME DST ON ANOTHER FRQ

From :123456789

Work-F : 8291.0kHz

EQP will tune to the

above FRQ within 10s.

[Accept] [Ignore]

[Accept]

xiv

Equipment exterior

● JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) 250W/500W MF/HF Radio Equipment

Note: According to the composition, the model variants are as follows.

- JSS-2250 :250W Radiotelephone/ DSC

- JSS-2250N :250W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP

- JSS-2500 :500W Radiotelephone/ DSC

- JSS-2500N :500W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP

In this document, unless otherwise specified, “JSS-2250/2500” may include “JSS-2250N/2500N”.

NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver

NBD-2250/2500 Power supply NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner

NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller/NQW-261 Handset

xv

NDZ-227 Data terminal / NDF-369 Keyboard

NKG-800 Printer

xvi

● DPU-414 Printer

● NKG-91 Printer

● NBB-714 Battery charger (10A)

● NBB-724 Battery charger

● NCH-321A Distress Message Controller (DMC)

Contents

Preface ......................................................................................................... v

Before operation ......................................................................................... vi

Handling precautions ................................................................................. viii

DISTRESS ALERTS .................................................................................... xi

Equipment exterior ..................................................................................... xiv

Glossary of terms ....................................................................................... xxi

1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Functions ................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Features ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 Basic configuration .................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................ 1-2

1.3.1.1 Standard components .................................................................................. 1-2

1.3.1.2 Options ........................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................ 1-3

1.3.2.1 Standard components .................................................................................. 1-3

1.3.2.2 Options ........................................................................................................... 1-3

1.3.3 System configuration ........................................................................................... 1-4

1.4 External dimensions .................................................................................................. 1-5

1.5 Block diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-12

1.5.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................ 1-12

1.5.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................ 1-13

2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Controller (NCM-2150) .............................................................................................. 2-1

2.2 Controller’s display ...................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2.1 Status display ....................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2.2 Operating display ................................................................................................. 2-4

2.2.3 Function screen and key operations .................................................................... 2-6

2.2.4 Menu screen ........................................................................................................ 2-7

2.3 Data terminal（NDZ-227） ......................................................................................... 2-8

2.4 Display of data terminal ............................................................................................... 2-9

2.4.1 Regular screen ..................................................................................................... 2-9

2.4.2 Telex communication screen ................................................................................ 2-10

2.4.3 Message file edit screen ...................................................................................... 2-11

3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 3-1

4. OPERATION ............................................................................................ 4-1

4.1 Operation overview ................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Operation of the controller .................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.2 Operation of the data terminal ............................................................................. 4-4

4.2 Basic communications procedure ............................................................................. 4-6

4.2.1 Turning on the power .......................................................................................... 4-6

4.2.2 Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode ................................................... 4-7

4.2.3 Communicating in radiotelephone mode ............................................................ 4-8

4.2.4 Communicating in CW mode .............................................................................. 4-10

4.2.5 Receiving AM broadcasts .................................................................................... 4-12

4.2.6 Communicating in telex mode (TLX) ................................................................... 4-13

4.2.6.1 ARQ mode operation ................................................................................... 4-13

4.2.6.2 CFEC mode operation ................................................................................. 4-16

4.2.6.3 SFEC mode operation ................................................................................. 4-20

4.2.6.4 Editing telex messages ................................................................................ 4-22

4.3 Setting the radio ........................................................................................................ 4-25

4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies .............................................................. 4-25

4.3.2 Setting the communication channels .................................................................. 4-26

4.3.3 Setting the automatic gain control (AGC) ........................................................... 4-30

4.3.4 Setting the noise reduction (NR) ......................................................................... 4-30

4.3.5 Setting the attenuation (ATT) .............................................................................. 4-31

4.3.6 Setting the clarifier ............................................................................................... 4-31

4.3.7 Setting the squelch level ..................................................................................... 4-32

4.3.8 Setting the CW bandwidth ................................................................................... 4-32

4.3.9 Scanning the Rx frequencies .............................................................................. 4-33

4.3.10 Reducing the Tx power ....................................................................................... 4-35

4.3.11 Setting the antenna tuning power ....................................................................... 4-35

4.3.12 Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function .......................................................... 4-35

4.4 Basic DSC operations ................................................................................................. 4-36

4.4.1 Routine calls to an individual station ................................................................... 4-36

4.4.2 Receiving routine individual calls ........................................................................ 4-38

4.4.3 Routine group calls .............................................................................................. 4-40

4.4.4 Receiving routine group calls .............................................................................. 4-40

4.5 Emergency calls (DSC distress/urgency/safety calls) ................................................ 4-41

4.5.1 Safety or urgency calls to an individual station ................................................... 4-41

4.5.1.1 Special safety individual calls ...................................................................... 4-41

4.5.2 Receiving safety or urgency individual calls ....................................................... 4-43

4.5.2.1 Receiving special safety individual calls ...................................................... 4-43

4.5.3 Safety or urgency area calls ................................................................................ 4-44

4.5.4 Receiving safety or urgency area calls ............................................................... 4-45

4.5.5 Distress alerts ...................................................................................................... 4-46

4.5.5.1 Quick distress alerts .................................................................................... 4-46

4.5.5.2 Distress alerts from the menu ...................................................................... 4-49

4.5.5.3 Receiving distress alerts .............................................................................. 4-52

4.5.6 Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE) ............................. 4-53

4.6 DSC call log ............................................................................................................... 4-55

4.6.1 Received distress messages ............................................................................... 4-55

4.6.2 Received other messages ................................................................................... 4-56

4.6.3 Transmitted messages ......................................................................................... 4-56

4.7 Display of telex communication logs ......................................................................... 4-57

4.8 USB memory operation ............................................................................................. 4-58

4.9 Popup screens ........................................................................................................... 4-59

5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS .............................................................. 5-1

5.1 Date and time settings ............................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Own ship position and time settings .......................................................................... 5-3

5.3 Controller settings ...................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3.1 LCD adjustment ................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3.2 Sound settings ..................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3.3 User key assignments .......................................................................................... 5-5

5.3.4 Selecting Tx meters ............................................................................................. 5-6

5.3.5 Transferring user channel data to another controller ........................................... 5-7

5.3.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown) .................................................. 5-8

5.3.7 Setting the reference value for the channel auto search ..................................... 5-8

5.4 Registering user channels ......................................................................................... 5-9

5.5 Advanced settings for DSC/WKR .............................................................................. 5-11

5.5.1 Automatic acknowledgement ............................................................................... 5-11

5.5.2 Setting DSC watch frequency .............................................................................. 5-11

5.5.3 Setting receiving alarms ....................................................................................... 5-12

5.5.4 Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls .................................................. 5-12

5.5.5 Registering the ship's group ID ............................................................................ 5-12

5.5.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold) ............................................ 5-13

5.5.7 Registering the DSC call list ................................................................................ 5-13

5.6 Setting connections for options ................................................................................. 5-14

5.7 Setting of data terminal .............................................................................................. 5-15

5.7.1 LCD adjustment ................................................................................................... 5-15

5.7.2 Registering station list .......................................................................................... 5-17

5.8 Setting telex mode ..................................................................................................... 5-19

6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION ............................................................. 6-1

6.1 General maintenance & inspection ............................................................................ 6-1

6.2 Self diagnosis inspection ........................................................................................... 6-2

6.3 System alarm indication ............................................................................................ 6-5

6.3.1 Alarm list .............................................................................................................. 6-6

6.3.2 Viewing the alarm history ..................................................................................... 6-9

6.4 Software version ........................................................................................................ 6-10

6.5 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 6-11

6.5.1 Procedures for locating malfunctions ................................................................... 6-11

6.5.2 Guide to locating faults ........................................................................................ 6-12

6.5.3 Consumables ....................................................................................................... 6-13

6.5.4 Repair units/parts ................................................................................................. 6-13

6.5.5 Regular replacement parts ................................................................................... 6-14

7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE ....................................................................... 7-1

8. DISPOSAL ............................................................................................... 8-1

9. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment ................................................................ 9-1

9.2 Options ...................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.3 Peripheral interfaces ................................................................................................. 9-7

10. OPTIONS OPERATION ......................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714) ....................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724) ....................................................................................... 10-3

10.3 Printer (NKG-91) ....................................................................................................... 10-5

10.4 Printer (NKG-800) ..................................................................................................... 10-6

10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit ............................................................................ 10-9

11. Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls .................................................................. 11-1

11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls ............................................................... 11-2

11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls ........................................................ 11-2

11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX) ................................................................................ 11-3

11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation ........................................................................................ 11-23

Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements

Marking with market circulation mark

xxi

Glossary of terms

This section defines general and DSC terms related to this equipment.

● General terms

AMVER

Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel

Rescue System

System that informs another ship of position

of distress ship operated in the United States.

ARQ

Automatic Repeat reQuest

When communicating interactive in the telex

mode, this ARQ is used.

CFEC

Collective Forward Error Correction

When broadcasting in the telex mode, this

CFEC is used.

DSC

Digital Selective Calling device

Used in routine calls, safety and urgency

calls, and distress alerts for rescue requests.

GMDSS

Global Maritime Distress and Safety System.

GPS

Global Positioning system

IMO

International Maritime Organization

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

Establishes conventions and regulations for

all electrical wired and radio, land, sea, air,

and space communications. It contains

internal organizations such as ITU-R and

ITU-T.

ITU-R

The International Telecommunications Union

(ITU) radio communications department.

JASREP

Japanese Ship Reporting System

Ship position reporting system operated in

Japan.

LT

Local time

MF/HF

Medium frequencies and high frequencies

(300 kHz to 30 MHz)

MMSI

Maritime Mobile Service Identity

The 9-digit Maritime Mobile Service Identity

number assigned to each ship and coast

station.

NBDP

Narrow Band Direct Printing

It is a generic name of the device used to

communicate in the telex mode.

NMEA

Maritime equipment transmission standard

established by the National Marine

Electronics Association.

PTT

Push to talk

RCC

Rescue Co-ordinate Center

RMS

Remote Maintenance System

Transmits ship equipment information

temporarily stored in the VDR via Inmarsat to

land, for use in maintenance and

management of radio equipment.

RR

Radio Regulations

International regulations for radio transmission

established by the treaty of the ITU.

SELCAL Number(Selective Calling Number)

Selective Calling Number by NBDP.

It is the numbers of four digits (coast station)

or five digits (Ship station) used when the

other party is specified in the telex mode.

xxii

SFEC

Selective Forward Error Correction

When broadcasting to a specific group in the

telex mode, this SFEC is used.

SOLAS Convention

International Convention for Safety of Life at

Sea

The international convention applies to all

ships engaged on international voyages. A

safety certificate is issued if the conditions of

this convention are satisfied.

SQL

Squelch

A function that acts to suppress the audio

output of a receiver in the absence of a radio

signal of sufficient strength.

UTC

Universal Time Coordinated

VOL (Volume)

Speaker volume

WRC

World Radiocommunication Conference

WKR

Watch Keeping Receiver

The WKR is the receiver dedicated to

monitoring the distress and safety

frequencies.

● DSC terms

Address

General term for Maritime Mobile Serive

Identity number (MMSI).

This equipment uses To/From to distinguish

between the sender and receiver. It also

means the Self-ID (own ship MMSI) and

Dist-ID (MMSI of a ship in distress).

Category

Message code indicating priority of the call.

Priority levels are listed below.

・ Routine… General calls for routine work

・ Safety…

Calls for safety communications

・ Urgency…

Calls for urgent communications

・ Distress…

Calls for distress communications

DROBOSE

Distress relay call (to individual or to area)

on behalf of someone else who is in distress.

EOS (End Of Sequence)

Termination code appended to call

messages.

Other codes are listed below.

・ ACK RQ… Acknowledgement request

・ ACK BQ… Acknowledgement responding

to the ACK RQ

ECC (Error Check Character)

Error check code appended to the end of call

messages.

This is not normally displayed, but if an error

occurs on a message, an ECC error is

displayed.

Mode

Message code indicating communication

mode after a DSC call.

This equipment is fixed to radiotelephone.

Radiotelephone (TEL) or ARQ and FEC

(TLX) can be used.

Nature of Distress

Message code indicating the type of distress

when a distress alert is issued.

Codes are listed below.

・ Fire… Fire, explosion

・ Flooding… Flooding

・ Collision… Collision

・ Grounding… Grounding

・ Listing… Risk of ship capsizing

・ Sinking… Sinking

・ Disabled… Ship inoperable/adrift

・ Undesignated… Undesignated distress

・ Abandoning… Abandoning ship

・ Piracy attack… Piracy/robbery attack

・ Man overboard… Man overboard

Polling

Polling is a feature for routine calling.

It is used, for example, to confirm whether a

ship is within radio range when a coast

station requests navigational information of

the ship.

Reason

Message code indicating reason for negative

acknowledgement response.

Codes are listed below.

xxiii

・ No reason… No reason

・ Congestion… Maritime information

exchange center

congested

・ Busy… Busy

・ Queue… Queued

・ Barred… Station barred

・ No operator… No operator

・ Temp no oper…

Temporarily no operator

・ EQP disabled… Equipment disabled

・ Unable FRQ… Indicated frequency

cannot be used

・ Unable mode…

Indicated mode cannot

be used

Rx FRQ

Received frequency of the call

Subject/ Sub

Message code clarifying communication

contents when sending an urgency call to all

ships.

When sailing in dangerous waters, such as

in areas of political instability, these call

messages are used with the following

information.

・ Neutral ship: In accordance with ITU

resolution 18 (Mob-83), inform all ships

that own ship is of neutral nationality.

・ Medical TRANSP: Inform all ships

that own ship is performing medical

transportation, and is protected under the

1949 Geneva Convention.

Topic

Message codes in an acknowledged message

After sending an individual call, "Unable to

comply" is displayed when the responding

station cannot comply.

Type

Message code indicating the type of the call.

Codes are listed below.

・ Individual call… Individual call message

・ Individual ACK… Acknowledgement of

individual call message

・

Individual NACK

…

Negative acknowledgement

of individual call message

・ Group call… Group call message

・ GEO area call… Area call message

・ All ships call… Call to all ships

・ Distress… Distress alert message

・ Distress ACK… Acknowledgement of

distress alert message

・ Distress relay… Distress relay message

・

Distress relay ACK

… Acknowledgement of

distress relay message

・

Distress relay GEO

… Area call of distress

relay message

Intent

Message code indicating specific content.

Indicates the type of the call for a specific

purpose, not for radiotelephone

communication.

・ Polling… Polling

・ Position RQ… Ship position request

・ Ship position…

Ship position notification

・ Test… Safety test call

Work FRQ/ WFRQ

Message code indicating communication

frequency after a DSC call.

xxiv

Equipment Overview

1-1

1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

1.1 Functions

This equipment includes MF/HF transceiver, Class-A DSC and DSC watch keeping receiver required

as the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). It is designed as a separated

transceiver and small, lightweight controller(s) for easy installation not only in SOLAS Convention

ships such as international passenger ships and freight ships of 300 tons or more, but also

non-conventional ships of less than 300 tons.

As for the main communication function, in addition to the communications of radiotelephone with the

handset and the Morse communication with the CW keyer, calling by digital selective calling (DSC) for

a general or distress communication are possible. Furthermore, if the data terminal is connected to the

controller, the telex communication in the ARQ or FEC mode using the NBDP is available.

1.2 Features

● Compliant with the ITU Radio Regulations (RR), the IMO performance standards, and the ITU-R

recommendations.

● Contains all channels specified in the ITU Radio Regulations (RR).

● The separately designed controller and main unit enable easy installation in limited or difficult

spaces.

● A semi-transmissive LCD with a wide viewing angle is easily viewable even in direct light or when

backlit and allows it to be installed in a variety of positions.

● The backlights of the LCD and operation keys are fully adjustable, preventing interference with

night watch keeping.

● When in distress, the DSC can send a distress message with the expanded position data accurate

up to 1/10000 of a minute for both latitude and longitude to make search and rescue operations by

the RCC easier.

● High-quality stable operation is possible by using DSP technology on a transceiver with a

DSC/WKR modem.

● The DSC operates in Class A mode suitable for all areas, and in Class B mode limited to ships

navigating in A1 and A2 areas.

● An advanced digital audio amplifier with a built-in loud speaker provides a maximum of 5 W of

clear audio.

● The maintenance and the check can be easily done at daily or the regular services, because a

special function key was prepared for the DSC safety test calling and the self-diagnosis.

● It is possible to operate on the screen with the character color and the background color

corresponding to the favor because the data terminal for the telex communication by NBDP

adopted the color liquid crystal display of the wide viewing angle in high brightness.

● Besides printers and GPS, other peripherals such as the remote maintenance system (RMS) can

be connected to the equipment.

Equipment Overview

1-2

1.3 Basic configuration

1.3.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500)

1

1.

.3

3.

.1

1.

.1

1

Standard components

No. Description Model Qty Notes

1 Transceiver NTD-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

2 Power supply NBD-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

3 MF/HF controller NCM-2150 1

3-1 Controller cable 7ZCJD0343 1 5m

3-2 Handset NQW-261 1 Includes the cradle

4 Antenna tuner NFC-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

5 Instruction manual 7ZPJD0622 1 This manual

1

1.

.3

3.

.1

1.

.2

2

Options

No. Description Model Notes

1 Battery charger NBB-724 22A

2 Battery charger NBB-714 10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only

3 Joint box JQD-69C For both RX and WKR

4 Junction box NQD-2253

5 Coaxial connector M-P-7, M-A-JJ For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY

6 MF/HF controller NCM-2150 One additional controller available.

6-1 Controller cable 7ZCJD0343 5m

6-2 Handset NQW-261 Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent)

6-3 Flush mounting bracket MPBC42957

6-4 Mounting bracket MPBX44354

6-5 Connection box NQD-2250

For extension and expansion of the controller

7 Printer NKG-800/900

Desktop type

7-1 Printer connection cable 6ZCSC00407

7-2 Printer power cable 6JNKD00100B

7-3 Printer paper 5ZPCM00020

7-4 Ink ribbon (SP-16051) 5ZZCM00003

8 Printer NKG-91

Wall mount or

flush mount type

8-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCJD0254A

8-2 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384

8-3 Wall mounting bracket MPBP31446

9 Printer DPU-414

Desktop type

9-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCJD0254A

9-2 Printer power cable 7ZCJD0257C

9-3 Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A

10

Distress message controller

NCH-321A

Equipment Overview

1-3

1.3.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N)

1

1.

.3

3.

.2

2.

.1

1

Standard components

No. Description Model Qty Notes

1 Transceiver NTD-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

2 Power supply NBD-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

3 MF/HF controller NCM-2150 1

3-1 Controller cable 7ZCJD0343 1 5m

3-2 Handset NQW-261 1 Includes the cradle

4 Antenna tuner NFC-2250/2500 1 For 250W and 500W respectively

5 Data terminal NDZ-227 1

NBDP option

5-1 DTE cable 7ZCJD0388 1

5-2 DTE power cable 7ZCJD0419 1

5-3 Keyboard NDF-369 1

6 Printer NKG-800 1

6-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCSC0205A 1

6-2 Printer power cable 6JNKD00100B 1

7 Instruction manual 7ZPJD0622 1 This manual

1

1.

.3

3.

.2

2.

.2

2

Options

No. Description Model Notes

1 Battery charger NBB-724 22A

2 Battery charger NBB-714 10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only

3 Joint box JQD-69C For both RX and WKR

4 Junction box NQD-2253

5 Coaxial connector M-P-7, M-A-JJ For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY

6 MF/HF controller NCM-2150 One additional controller available.

6-1 Controller cable 7ZCJD0343 5m

6-2 Handset NQW-261 Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent)

6-3 Flush mounting bracket MPBC42957

6-4 Mounting bracket MPBX44354

6-5 Connection box NQD-2250

For extension and expansion of the controller

7 Data terminal NDZ-227

For expansion of the controller

7-1 DTE cable 7ZCJD0388

7-2 DTE power cable 7ZCJD0419

7-3 Keyboard NDF-369

7-4 Mounting bracket MPBP31721

7-5 USB memory UDG4-1GAR-JRC Hagiwara Sys-Com / 1GB

8 Printer NKG-800/900

Desktop type

8-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCSC0205A

8-2 Printer power cable 6JNKD00100B

8-3 Printer paper 5ZPCM00020

8-4 Ink ribbon (SP-16051) 5ZZCM00003

9 Printer NKG-91

Wall mount or

flush mount type

9-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCJD0254A

9-2 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384

9-3 Wall mounting bracket MPBP31446

10 Printer DPU-414

Desktop type

10-1 Printer connection cable 7ZCJD0254A

10-2 Printer power cable 7ZCJD0257C

10-3 Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A

11

Distress message controller

NCH-321A

Equipment Overview

1-4

1.3.3 System configuration

NCH-321A DMC

GPS

NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver

Expansion Controller

* The equipment can also be

connected to the VDR

server to use the remote

maintenance system.

NFC-2250/2500

Antenna Tuner

NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller

NQW-261 Handset

NKG-800 Printer

NDZ-227 Data terminal

NDF-369 Keyboard

(DSC/NBDP model only)

NBD-2250/2500 Power supply

NBB-724 Battery charger

Equipment Overview

1-5

1.4 External dimensions

Below are the external dimensions of each unit.

（１） Transceiver (NTD-2250/2500)

（２） Power Supply (NBD-2250/2500)

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 17 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 18 kg

Note) This figure shows the NTD-2250.

Incase of the NTD-2500, 3 fans are

mounted on the back.

Equipment Overview

1-6

（３） MF/HF Controller (NCM-2150)

（４） Handset (NQW-261)

（５） Connection box (NQD-2250)

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 1.3 kg

Mounting

hole

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg

Equipment Overview

1-7

（６） Antenna Tuner (NFC-2250/2500)

（７） Junction Box (NQD-2253)

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 1.2 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 10 kg/ 10 kg

Equipment Overview

1-8

（８） Data Terminal (NDZ-227)

（９） Keyboard (NDF-369)

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 0.4 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 4.6 kg

Equipment Overview

1-9

（１０） Printer (NKG-800)

● Desktop type

（１１） Printer (DPU-414)

● Desktop type

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 3.7 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg

Equipment Overview

1-10

（１２） Printer (NKG-91)

● Wall mount type

● Flash mount type

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 1.5 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 0.8 kg

Equipment Overview

1-11

（１３） Battery Charger (NBB-714)

（１４） Battery Charger (NBB-724)

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 12 kg

Unit: mm

Weight: Approx. 8.6 kg

Equipment Overview

1-12

1.5 Block diagram

1.5.1 DSC model (JSS-2250/2500)

24V DC

200Ah

GPS

AME

RMS

(VDR)

DPYC-16

TTYCS- 1

MPYCS- 7

TTYCS- 1

TTYCS- 4

100V/220V AC

50/60Hz 1φ

NCH-321A

DMC

DPYC-25

RG-12/UY

RX/WKR ANT

TX

ANT

M-P-7

Tx antenna

Rx/WKR

antenna

TTYCS- 4

DPYC-2.5

7ZCJD

0343

（5m）

NQD-2250

Connection

box

NFC-2250/2500

Antenna tuner

TX ANT

Lead wire

TH-19/1.2

NCM-2150

MF/HF Controller

NQW-261

Handset

JQD-69C

Joint box

NQD-2250

Connection

box

Expansion controller

7ZCJD0254A

TTYCS- 4

DPYC-2.5

NKG-91

Printer

6.5V DC

NTD-2250/2500

Transceiver

NBD-2250/2500

Power supply

NBB-724

Battery charger

7ZCJD

0426

M-P-7

TTYCYS-4

NQD-2253

Junction

box

RG-10/UY

M-P-7/M-P-5

M-A-JJ

Equipment Overview

1-13

1.5.2 DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N)

RG-12/UY

7ZCJD

0426

M-P-7

Tx antenna

Rx/WKR

antenna

TTYCS- 4

DPYC-2.5

7ZCJD

0343

（5m）

NQD-2250

Connection

box

NFC-2250/2500

Antenna tuner

TX ANT

TTYCYS-4

Lead wire

TH-19/1.2

NQD-2253

Junction

box

NCM-2150

MF/HF Controller

NQW-261

Handset

JQD-69C

Joint box

RG-10/UY

M-P-7/M-P-5

M-A-JJ

NDZ-227

Data terminal

NDF-369

Keyboard

NKG-800

Printer

NQD-2250

Connection

box

Expansion controller

7ZCJD0419

6JNKD00100B

7ZCJD0388

7ZCSC0205A

TTYCS- 4

DPYC-2.5

GPS

AME

RMS

(VDR)

TTYCS- 1

MPYCS- 7

TTYCS- 1

TTYCS- 4

NCH-321A

DMC

NTD-2250/2500

Transceiver

NBD-2250/2500

Power supply

NBB-724

Battery charger

RX/WKR ANT

TX

ANT

24V DC

200Ah

DPYC-16 100V/220V AC

50/60Hz 1φ

DPYC-25

Equipment Overview

1-14

Names and Functions

2-1

2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

2.1 Controller (NCM-2150)

The controller parts and their functions are described below.

1. Internal loud speaker

2. Jack for telegraph in continuous wave (CW) mode

3. Black and white liquid crystal display unit

4. Numeric keypad (10-key) and function keys

In addition to entering numeric values, when combined with the

FUNC key, the keys have the following functions.

･ TEL ··· Sets TEL mode with the last or default frequency.

･ DSC ··· Sets DSC mode with the last or default frequency.

･ CW ··· Sets CW mode with the last or default frequency.

･ 1CLAR ··· Displays the setting screen for the clarifier.

･ 2SCAN ··· Displays the scan menu.

･ 3NR ··· Displays the setting screen for noise reduction.

･ 4ATT ··· Displays the setting screen for attenuation.

･ 5AGC ···

Displays the setting screen for automatic gain control.

･ 6SP ··· Turns speaker on or off.

･ 7PRN ··· Prints the specified screen.

･ 8TEST ··· Displays the self-diagnosis menu.

･ 9 ··· Switches Tx power between high, medium and low.

･ 0 ··· Displays the DSC test call menu.

･ FUNC ···

Enables 10-key functions or changes an active screen.

1

4

5

14 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

2

3

15

16

PWR

RDC

TEST

CALL

Names and Functions

2-2

･ ENT ····· Enter key.

･ USER ····· User defined key. Register a frequently used menu to open it quickly.

･ ····· Tunes the antenna.

･ CH ····· Sets the channel input mode (user channel, ITU channel, or free frequency).

5. Jog dial

- On the status display, rotating the jog dial changes the channel or Rx frequency.

- On the operating display, rotating the jog dial changes the frequency on the transceiver

setting screen, selects the event on the procedure list screen, or selects the handling menu

on the message/event control screen.

- On a menu or popup screen, rotating the jog dial moves the cursor position or screen

contents. When selecting a button or an item on the screen, rotate the jog dial until the

cursor is on it and then press the jog dial.

Pressing the jog dial works as with the Enter key.

6. Handset connector

7. DISTRESS key (Under a clear cover with spring)

When in distress, sends a DSC distress alert when pressed and held for 4 seconds.

8. RF GAIN control

Adjusts sensitivity level.

RF GAIN is set to maximum just after DSC or TLX mode is set, regardless of the

position of the control.

9. DIM (Dimmer) key

Adjusts dimmer level (Max → Typ → Min → Off) of the LCD display and key switches.

Additionally used to put into sleep mode by pressing it in combination with the key at the

same time (a confirmation screen is displayed).

・ The adjusted dimmer level is not saved. When the controller is powered off

and on again, the dimmer level is always set to Typ (default).

・ If a DSC message is received, the dimmer adjustment cycle becomes "Max →

Typ → Typ → Typ" while the receiving alarm is activated.

10. PWR/CONT (Power/Contrast) key

Turns on the equipment or changes the controller from sleep mode to standby. Once turned on,

this key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast.

11. VOL (Volume) control

Adjusts volume of built-in loud speaker.

12. ALM/WKR (Alarm/Watchkeeping receiver) lamp

Lights up red on any malfunction detected in the equipment or after sending a DSC distress alert,

or blinks red on receiving a DSC call. Lights green to indicate the DSC watchkeeping receiver is

operating while the equipment is in sleep mode.

13. CANCEL key

Cancels menus, a procedure on the operating display or stops alarms.

14. MENU key

Displays menu list.

15. Handset

When using in radiotelephone mode, press and hold the PTT key to talk.

16. Cradle (for handset)

ANT

TUNE

Note

PWR

CONT

Note

Names and Functions

2-3

2.2 Controller’s display

The LCD screen on the controller changes according to current conditions. This section

describes the status display, operating display, FUNC menu, and main menu screens.

2.2.1 Status display

1. Occupied mark. Indicates another controller

has the access rights.

2. Indicates the ship's MMSI.

3. Indicates the ship's position and that time.

4. Indicates the communication mode and

channel.

5. Indicates the receiver is scanning.

6. Indicates the Tx power condition (reduction

settings) as follows.

z High : (Blank)

z Medium :

z Low :

7. Indicates the following conditions if Tx

frequency is not tuned.

z Not tuned : Blinks

z Tuning : Lights

z Tuned : (Blank)

8. Indicates transmission status (PA power).

9. When in reception or standby, indicates

strength of received signal (S meter), or

when in transmission, indicates strength of

transmitted signal in one of the pre-set

units shown below.

z Tx power (PWR)

z Antenna current (Ia)

z PA voltage (Vc)

z PA current (Ic)

z Key information (KEY)

Note: When transmitting in ARQ mode, KEY

is displayed regardless of the above

mentioned setting.

Additionally, the right icon indicates the

built-in loud speaker is on or off. The mark

of indicates the squelch is on.

10. Indicates the frequency (band) the DSC

watch keeping receiver is monitoring for

distress and safety calls.

11. Indicates the equipment is running on DC

power.

12. Indicates current time as follows:

z Universal time coordinated : UTC

z Local time : LT

13. Indicates the source of the ship's position

information as follows.

z External device (e.g. GPS) : EXT

z Manual input : MAN

z No input : OFFLINE

14. Indicates the user channel in use is

transmitted at the band power level

because the channel power is not

registered.

15. Indicates channel or frequency is duplex

for communicating with a coast station.

16. Indicates the reception frequency.

17. Indicates the transmission frequency. TX

mark is highlighted when transmitting.

18. Indicates the reception status (attenuation,

AGC, noise reduction).

19. Indicates the operation guidance (shortcut)

to send the DSC messages.

z NonDST: To send a non-distress alert,

holding down the MENU, press 1 key.

z DROBOS: To send a drobose call,

holding down the MENU, press 2 key.

z EdtDST: To edit & send a distress alert,

holding down the MENU, press 3 key.

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

*

11

13

15

17

18

5

4

3

2

1

12

8

16

19

6

14

9

7

10

Names and Functions

2-4

2.2.2 Operating display

(1) General

After setting the frequency, pressing PTT key in TEL mode, sending/receiving messages in

DSC/TLX mode, and things like that, the controller shows the operating display as follows.

1. Indicates the MMSI and the latest position

and that time.

2. Indicates an focused screen with sign

and thick-frame, i.e. the operating display

is divided into three screens as below,

where the focused screen can be moved

using the FUNC key for clockwise.

3. Indicates the transceiver setting screen

similar to the status display. Icons on this

area are as follows.

z Scanning :

z Not tuned yet :

z Tx power reduction :

z Turned the PA ON :

z Attenuation (dB) :

z AGC (Fast/ Slow) :

z

Noise reduction (NR1/NR2/BC)

:

4. Indicates the S meter and watchkeeping

receiver monitoring frequencies mentioned

above.

5. Indicates the existing procedures. If the

procedure is under operation (active), A

mark is added in the box frame. Further, if

other procedures on hold exist, they are

indicated in the other box frames and are

selectable to operate at any time. And

while this screen is focused, the turning

dial animation is shown as below.

6. Indicates the content and the handling

menus of the procedure located at the top

of the procedure list screen.

During operating an active procedure, any functions such like the DSC automatic

acknowledgement become invalid to avoid the ongoing communication interruption.

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

13077.0

12230.0

DUP

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

13077.0

12230.0

DUP

3

1

2

5

6

Transceiver

setting

Procedure

list

Message/event

control

Note

4

Names and Functions

2-5

(2) Operating display of DSC calls

When communicating using DSC messages, the controller shows as follows.

1. Indicates the transceiver setting screen

similar to the status display mentioned

above.

2. Indicates the message type according to

the following components.

¾ Call direction : Calling event -

Called event -

¾ Category : RTN… routine

SAF… safety

URG… urgency

DST… distress

¾ Address type : IND… individual

ARE… area

GRP… group

¾ DST type : ALT… distress alert

RLY… distress relay

CNL… distress cancel

ACK… distress ack

¾ Other type : TST… safety test

POS… safety position

POLL… routine polling

EOS…

routine ind w/o ack

Additionally, indicates COMM if started

communication without using DSC.

3. Indicates procedures information of active

or on hold with the DSC categories or COM.

4. Indicates the message info as follows;

¾ Destination/source ID to comm with:

TxTO/RxID

¾ Address type:

IND, Area, GRP, All

¾ Category or DST type:

RTN, SAF, URG, DST

DISTRESS ALT, DST RLY,

¾ Other information:

ACK, NACK

5. Indicates the DSC message status with the

elapsed time of the top frame procedure.

Additionally the following special marks may

be indicated on this line.

E … Indicates when including the ECC

error in the message.

D … Indicates when the DSC procedure

is started by receiving a delayed

ACK without a calling message.

6. Indicates the message received frequency.

7. Indicates the subsequent frequency if exist.

8. Indicates the handling menus. This figure

shows the following menus.

¾ ACK : Accepts the call and sends ACK

¾ NCK : Sends “unable to comply”

¾ NEW : Sends ACK with new work FRQ

¾ INF : Indicates the detail info

¾ HLD : Makes the active proc on hold

¾ END : Terminates the procedure

- When sending the “able to comply” acknowledgement against the received

message requesting the TEL communication, lifting handset is also available as a

substitute for selecting the ACK handling menu.

- When selecting the NEW or NCK menu, the dedicated popup screen is appeared.

- When sending an acknowledgement automatically to the receiving calls such as

position request, safety test, polling, or the call requesting communication with

an invalid frequency, the above screen is shown and starts sending automatically.

After finishing it, that screen is closed automatically.

1

5

2

3

4

6

Note

7 8

Names and Functions

2-6

2.2.3 Function screen and key operations

The functions assigned to the number keys are temporarily enabled by pressing the FUNC

key in the status display or holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key.

1. Indicates the enabled number key and its

function when the FUNC key is pressed in

the status display. Pressing the number

keys here operates the function for that

key as shown at the right.

1 CLAR : Displays the clarifier adjustment menu

2 SCAN : Displays the scan menu

3 NR : Displays the noise reduction menu

4 ATT : Displays the attenuation menu

5 AGC : Displays the AGC menu

6 SP : Turns the built-in loud speaker on or off

7 N/A : PRN is valid only on specific menus.

8 TEST : Displays the self-diagnosis menu

9 : Displays the Tx power reduction menu

0

TstC al l

: Displays the DSC test call menu

FuncCncl

: Closes this screen

2. Indicates that pressing ENT enables or disables the use of the jog dial to change the frequency

and channel in the status display.

- During the operating display mentioned above, the function screen is not appeared.

In this case the FUNC key alone is available to select the screen. However note

that the holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key is also valid.

- In the following situations the function assigned to the function key cannot be used.

Equipment

status 1CLAR 2SCAN 3NR 4ATT 5AGC 6SP 7PRN 8TEST 9

P

WR

R

DC 0 TEST

CALL

DSC mode ● ●

While printing ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

During

self-diagnosis ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

While

scanning ● ● ●

While alarm

screen is

displayed ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1

2

PWR

RDC

Note

Names and Functions

2-7

2.2.4 Menu screen

1. Indicates the current menu name.

2. Indicates the menu content. The cursor line

or position is highlighted. Select items with

the jog dial and press ENT to confirm.

3. Indicates the main radio information the

same as the status display. Also indicates

the following marks in the frequency

information area according to the

conditions.

T ： Performing the antenna tuning

(Blinking means “Not tuned”.)

M ： Tx power is Medium.

L ： Tx power is low.

3

1

2

Main menu

1.DSC non-distress call

2.DSC drobose call

3.Editing a distress msg

4.DSC logs

5.Radio operation

6.Maintenance

7.Setup

0.Back

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz

1.DSC non-distress call

Names and Functions

2-8

2.3 Data terminal（NDZ-227）

This section describes the name of each part in the data terminal and the function.

1. Color liquid crystal display (LCD) unit

2. POWER lamp

This lamp lights to green while operating the data terminal, and blinks during the sleep.

3. READY lamp

This lamp lights to green while serial communications are being normally done. And, when

abnormality occurs, it turns off.

4. COMM lamp

This lamp lights to green while communicating in ARQ or FEC mode.

5. DIM (Dimmer) key

This key adjusts the brightness of the LCD screen and the lamp by four stages (high, middle, low,

and off).

6. Connector for the USB memory with the water-proof rubber cap

Pull out the rubber cap and connect the USB memory.

7. Keyboard

7

1

2

5

6

3

4

Names and Functions

2-9

2.4 Display of data terminal

The content displayed on the LCD screen in the data terminal is different according to the

situation. This section describes a regular screen, the telex communication screen, and the

message file edit screen.

2.4.1 Regular screen

1. Indicates the Tx and Rx frequencies.

2. Indicates the communication mode.

3. Indicates the main menu.

When pressing the Enter key, indicates

the drop-down menu of the main menu

pointed by the cursor.

※Telex mode only.

4. Indicates the conditions of the telex

communication.

※Telex mode only.

5. Indicates the scanning information in telex

mode. When restarting scanning after

sending a DSC Auto-ACK or powering

off/on, indicates “Running now” instead of

the detail information.

※Telex mode only.

6. Indicates the operation result such as the

self-diagnosis.

7. Indicates the guide according to the

cursor position. Moreover, the locating

faults are displayed if any errors occur.

z Information: MEM ：Internal memory

z Information: KBD ：Keyboard control

z Information: PRN ：Printer

z Information: USB ：USB Memory

8. Indicates that the connected USB memory

is available. Additionally, “ACS” is shown

if some time is needed to mount the USB

memory.

9. Indicates the antenna tuning condition.

z READY ：Tuned

z NOT READY ：Not tuned

10. Indicates the power reduction setting.

2

1 8

3

4

5

6

9

7

10

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

ST-BY

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.

File manager.

Information:MEM KBD PRN USB (Press the <Alt>+I if you want to know detail.)

File

Free sig. ST-BY Calling Receive Rephasing Repeat Traf

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Names and Functions

2-10

2.4.2 Telex communication screen

1. Indicates the operating condition of the

telex communication from the left of each

segment as follows.

1） In the autotelex mode, when the free

channel signal of the coast station is

detected, indicates the “Free Sig”.

2） Indicates the communication mode

(ARQ/CFEC/SFEC).

※Indicates “ST-BY” in the standby

condition.

3） Indicates “Calling” at the master

station, and “Called” at the slave

station.

4） Indicates “Send” at the information

sending station, and “Receive” at the

information receiving station.

5） Indicates "Phasing" while calling and

connecting the communication

channel and “Rephasing” while

reconnecting the channel after the

channel is disconnected due to the

channel condition in ARQ mode.

6） Indicates “Repeat” in ARQ mode if

requested to send the each block or

the control signal again.

7） Indicates “Traf” while sending or

receiving information and “RQ” while

sending or receiving RQ signal.

2. Indicates the telex message or the name

of the executed function key.

3. Indicates the usable function keys guide.

Each meaning is as follows.

z F2 WRU ： Requests the answer-

back code to the

corresponding station.

z F3 Hereis ： Sends the answerback

code of own station.

z F4 TMS ： Sends the date and the

time information.

z F5 Over ： Exchange the sending

and the receiving

condition.

z F6 POLL ： Acquires the sending

right if the correspond-

ing station (sending)

tries to finish the

communication in ARQ

mode.

※It is available only when the

corresponding station is using the

modem made of our company.

z F8 F.Send ： Sends a message file.

z F10 Stop ： Finishes the telex

communication.

1

2

3

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

TELEX Terminal Window

ARQ

Message start...

Free sig. ARQ Calling Send Rephasing Repeat Traf

Names and Functions

2-11

2.4.3 Message file edit screen

1. Indicates the state of the edit screen as

follows.

z Editing telex file ：File name

z Line ：Line position of cursor

z Column ：Row position of cursor

z Size ：Capacity of file

z

Insert On/Overwrite

：

Input mode (insert/overwrite)

2. The message file is edited here.

3. The list of the function key is displayed by the

following content separately for two groups.

z Group 1

・ F1 ：Insert On/Off

・ F2 ：Ins_Line

・ F3 ：Block

・ F4 ：Del_Word

・ F5 ：Del_Line

・ F6 ：

・ F7 ：Quit

・ F8 ：Save As

・ F9 ：Save & Quit

・ F10 ：- Others -

z Group 2

・ F1 ：Max Column

・ F2 ：Set Tab

・ F3 ：Undo_Char

・ F4 ：Undo_Word

・ F5 ：Undo_Line

・ F6 ：Merge File

・ F7 ：Find

・ F8 ：Print out

・

F9 ：Find/Replace

・ F10 ：- Others -

1

2

3

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

Editing telex file:001.TLX Line: 1 Column: 1 Size: 0 Insert On

[End of File]

F1:Insert Off F2:Ins_Line F3:Block F4:Del_Word F5:Del_Line

F7:Quit F8:Save As F9:Save & Quit F10: - Others -

MF

HF

Installation

3-1

3. INSTALLATION

CAUTION

To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents.

Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted and

setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to

installing the equipment.

Operation

4-1

4. OPERATION

This chapter describes basic operations of the controller and the data terminal,

radiotelephone communications, telex communications, DSC calling procedures, and

other radio functions.

4.1 Operation overview

4.1.1 Operation of the controller

Basically, the controller is operated with the numeric keypad (10key), the MENU key, and the jog

dial for other than the telex communication. The following is an overview of their operation.

z When two controllers are connected, only one controller having the access right can operate

the equipment except for sending a distress alert, changing audio volume, and changing

display conditions. (Unless otherwise mentioned, the instructions below are for the controller

with the access rights.)

z To obtain the access right at a controller without access rights, press ENT to get the access

right unless the other controller is being operated (PTT/KEY ON or menu operations).

z The DISTRESS key is always available. (The DISTRESS key has the highest priority.)

z On the status display or the operating display, the communication frequency or channel can

be set by using the number keys or if the transceiver setting screen is focused on, setting it

by rotating the jog dial is also available.

z Pressing the TEL DSC or CW key changes the communication mode. If the screen displays

in the menu, immediately shows the status display or the operating display, and also the

channel input mode changes to the free frequency mode. Additionally, the communication

mode can be changed to the AM mode to listen to the radio broadcasting or to the DATA

mode to communicate using the intership fax

z When the communication mode is set to TEL or CW, pressing the same communication mode

key turns the PA on and off. (When the PA is on, ON mark appears.)

z All functions can be accessed using the MENU key, jog dial, and the dedicated keys/controls.

(See the menu tree on the next page.) Further, screens in the menu tree indicated by

"Printable" can be printed from a printer connected to the controller or the data terminal by

pressing and holding the FUNC key and then pressing the 7PRN key.

z Pressing or pressing and holding the FUNC (function) key and a number key allows rapid

access to that function.

z There are two ways to access main menu items. After pressing the MENU key to display the

main menu, use either the jog dial to move the cursor to the desired item and press ENT to

select it, or select the item by pressing the respective number key. (Ex: For Self diagnosis

(6.1.1 Transceiver), press MENUÎ6SPÎ1CLARÎ1CLAR)

z Any menu can be assigned to the USER key to open it with a single touch of a button.

z Normally the key is always enabled.

z Pressing the CH key changes the channel input mode to the User ch, ITU ch or to the free

frequency. This key is enabled when showing the status display or the operating display.

z Pressing the CANCEL key in any menu moves the display up one level in the hierarchy (or to

the status display). The same results can be achieved by selecting "0. Back" when available

on-screen. Further, pressing the CANCEL key on an input line will clear the entered data.

z Pressing the MENU key in any menu opens the main menu. Also, pressing MENU while

in the main menu returns to the status display or the operating display.

z Dialog boxes (popup screens) are opened when necessary and operations can be done in

the dialog box.

z When using DSC calls, to distinguish the messages or conditions, some specific alarms are

provided as listed after the menu tree below.

ANT

TUNE

Operation

4-2

Menu tree

Main Menu Hierarchical Menu 1 Hierarchical Menu 2 Shortcut Key Note

1. DSC non-distress call MENU+1(RTN)

FUNC+0

(

Te s t

)

2. DSC drobose call MENU+2

3. Editing a distress msg MENU+3

4. DSC logs 4.1 Received distress (Received message screen) Printable

4.2 Received others (Received message screen) Printable

4.3 Transmitted calls

(Transmitted message screen)

Printable

5. Radio operation 5.1 User channel list (index) 5.1 User channel list (table) Printable

5.2 ITU channel list (index) 5.2 ITU channel list (table) Printable

5.3 Mode

5.4 Receiver 5.4.1 Auto gain control FUNC+5

5.4.2 Noise reduction FUNC+3

5.4.3 Attenuation FUNC+4

5.4.4 Clarifier FUNC+1

5.4.5 Squelch

5.4.6 CW bandwidth

5.4.7 Scan FUNC+2

5.5 Transmitter 5.5.1 Power FUNC+9

5.5.2 Tune power

5.5.3 Auto tune start

6. Maintenance 6.1 Self diagnosis 6.1.1 Transceiver

(ATU/PA/TRX/WKR MODEM)

FUNC+8

Printable

6.1.2 Controller/DTE Printable

6.1.3 Transceiver log Printable

6.1.4 Controller/DTE log Printable

6.1.5 DSC/NBDP loop Printable

6.1.6 Printout

6.2 Alarm information Alarm history Printable

6.3 Software version Printable

7. Setup 7.1 Date & time 7.1.1 Date

7.1.2 Present time

7.1.3 Display form

7.2 POS/TIME 7.2.1 Own position

7.2.2 UTC of position

7.3 My controller 7.3.1 LCD adjustment

1. Contrast

2. Dimmer

3. Screen saver

7.3.2 Sound

1. Operation

2. Notification level

3. Sidetone

FUNC+6(SP)

7.3.3 User key assign

7.3.4 Tx meter

7.3.5 Data transfer

7.3.6 Menu shutdown

7.3.7 CH search ref

7.4 User channels (index) 7.4 User channels (table) Printable

7.5 DSC/WKR condition 7.5.1 Automatic ACK

1. Test call

2. Position RQ call

3. Polling call

4. Individual call

7.5.2 WKR scanning FRQ

7.5.3 DSC alarm setting

1.

Safety/Routine RX ALM

2. Distress RX ALM

7.5.4 Medical use

7.5.5 Neutral use

7.5.6 Group-ID

7.5.7 Inactivity timeout

1. ACKed distress alert

2. RCVed other distress

3. Non-distress call

4. Other communications

7.5.8 DSC call list

7.6 Option 7.6.1 Connection Printable

7.6.2 Data out

7.6.3 Baudrate

7.6.4 Flow control

7.6.5 Print direction

Operation

4-3

DSC alarm specifications

The following table summarizes the alarm characteristics when communicating particularly in the

DSC mode.

Reason for the alarm Sound Increase Shutdown

Receiving a new distress

event

Two tones of

2200Hz(250ms) and 1300Hz(250ms)

Yes Manually

Acknowledging a received

distress event

Two tones of

2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms)

No Manually

Acknowledging a sent own

distress event

Two tones of

2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms)

No Manually

Receiving a new urgency

event

Intermittent tones of

2200Hz(250ms) and silence(250ms)

Yes Manually

Acknowledging a sent

urgency event

Intermittent tones of

2200Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms)

No Manually

Receiving a new safety or

routine event

Two tones of

784Hz(1s) and 392Hz(1s)

Yes Automatically

(10s)

Acknowledging a sent safety

or routine event

Intermittent tones of

784Hz(1s) and silence(1s)

No Automatically

(10s)

Receiving a DSC message

pertinent to an ongoing event

Intermittent tones of

494Hz(100ms), silence(100ms) and

494Hz(1s)

No Automatically

(1 cycle)

Pressing the dedicated

distress button

An intermittent tone of

2000Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms)

No ---

If receiving a DSC message with the ECC error, the alarm is stopped automatically.

However if the same DSC messages are received repeatedly and the every error is

corrected at last, the original alarm may be sounded.

Note

Operation

4-4

4.1.2 Operation of the data terminal

Basically, the every function concerning the telex mode such as ARQ/FEC communication or

scanning can be operated from the data terminal.

● To connect and install the data terminal, setup the 7.6 Option menu of the controller.

● To set the communicate mode to the telex mode, press the Enter key of the keyboard.

Additionally, that operation acquires the access right if the controller connected to that data

terminal does not have the access right.

● Every function of the data terminal can be operated from the main menu displayed on a

regular screen, excluding the screen of communication modes other than the telex, telex

communicating screen, the telex file editing screen.

● Because the short-cut key to the table of next page is allocated in each item of the main

menu or the drop down menu, it is possible to execute it easily according to few procedures.

● The guide of the item shown with the cursor is basically displayed under the screen in the

data terminal.

● While displaying the menu screen on the controller, the data terminal cannot be operated

temporally. Similarly, the controller cannot be operated during the telex communication

except the operations of TEL DSC CW and DISTRESS keys.

● Besides the telex communication in ARQ/FEC mode, the data terminal has other functions

such as editing telex messages and the station list, setup of the radio condition, or setup of

the display color of the screen.

● The communication using ARQ mode can be started with a specific radio station by inputting

the selcal number (ID) and the work frequency.

● The communication using CFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting by inputting the

work frequency.

● The communication using SFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting for limited

receivers by inputting the selcal number (group ID) and work frequency.

● The telex communication channel can be set by specifying ARQ or FEC in the DSC message.

In this case, the telex communication may be started without inputting 9 digits selcal number

(ID) and work frequency because those have been already set by the DSC calling.

● Up to 20 stations can be registered in the station list.

● The self-diagnosis of the data terminal is executed from the controller as well as other units.

● The controller outputs the printing data from the printer connected to the data terminal.

● The condition of the data terminal such as the startup or the sleep is synchronized to the

controller connected or the system.

● When the data terminal detects any error(s) concerning to the internal flash memory, the

keyboard, the printer or the connected USB memory, immediately shows the popup screen

and the Information is displayed on the bottom line on the screen until the error is fixed.

Operation

4-5

Menu tree in data terminal

Main Menu Short-cut

Key Drop-down Key Short-cut

Key Remarks

File F Edit new file N

Edit existing file E

Rename file R

Delete file D

Copy file C

Initialize USB I

Remove USB U

Tune T Frequency list F Printable

ITU channel set C

Tx/Rx frequency set Q

Tx tune U

Scanning start (stop) S

Connect C ARQ A

CALL C Option

AUTOTELEX T Option

CFEC F

SFEC S

Service S Call logging history C Printable

Station list S Printable

Station database D Printable

Destination list L Option

Sunspot number N

MUF calculation M

Clear status window R

System Y Config C

Scan speed S

NBDP setup N

Help H Software version

Operation

4-6

4.2 Basic communications procedure

The following describes basic radio communication procedures.

4.2.1 Turning on the power

CAUTION

Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention

requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times.

Always listen to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following

frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz.

In class B mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Make sure the equipment is connected to a

power source and turn on the breakers on the

power supply.

¾ The controller, transceiver and data terminal

start the internal check.

¾ After the check is finished correctly, the status

display appears and becomes receiving

condition (standby) on the receiving frequency

showing.

- When turning on the controller or the

equipment in sleep mode, press

key for one second.

- Pressing key for 6 seconds

makes the system reset to restart.

- When two controllers are connected,

and one controller is turned on from

sleep mode, the status display is

displayed immediately without

checking operations.

- The start screen of the data terminal

is as shown at right.

- If errors are detected during the

operation check, the message is

displayed. Please inform JRC or our

agent of the error contents.

Note

PWR

CONT

PWR

CONT

Operation

4-7

4.2.2 Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode

CAUTION

When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers

on the power supply.

■ Procedure ■

Press the key and DIM key

simultaneously.

After that, the power-off process is activated

according to the controllers' status.

z When using only one controller

Select the desired item below on the

popup screen shown at right

⋅ [OK]: Turns off the power. (Puts into

sleep (energy saving) mode.)

⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.

z When using two controllers

On a controller with access rights, select

the desired item below on the popup

screen shown at right

⋅ [EQP]: Turns off the power. (Puts into

sleep (energy saving) mode.)

⋅ [CTRL]: Puts the controller into sleep

mode and gives access rights

to another controller.

⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.

On a controller without access rights,

select the desired item below on the

displayed popup screen at right

⋅ [OK]: Puts one controller into sleep

mode.

⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.

¾ In sleep mode, the equipment changes to the following statuses.

⋅ If all the equipment goes to sleep, the ALM lamp lights green to indicate

the DSC watch keeping receiver is on and operating.

⋅ The POWER lamp of the data terminal blinks.

⋅ If a distress or urgent DSC message is received, the equipment turns on

automatically and sounds an alarm.

¾ Turn off both the AC and DC breakers if turning off the power at the

NBD-2250/2500 Power supply.

Note

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

OK to sleep the

MF/HF equipment?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

[ OK ]

PWR

CONT

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

OK to sleep the MF/HF

equipment, or

only this controller?

[EQP] [CTRL] [Cancel]

[EQP]

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

OK to sleep this

controller?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

[ OK ]

Operation

4-8

4.2.3 Communicating in radiotelephone mode

Use the handset to communicate in radiotelephone mode.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

When operating on a controller without

access rights (OCC is displayed), press the

jog dial to obtain the access rights.

Unless the controller with access rights is being

used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC

display on the screen disappears.

2

2.

.

Press the TEL key.

¾ The communication mode is set to TEL and

the previous frequency (or the default

frequency at just after turning on) is set.

¾ Pressing the TEL key again turns the

power to the PA on and off.

¾ If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed

as shown at right.

3

3.

.

Set the frequency for making calls in

radiotelephone mode.

- When setting a frequency, the screen

becomes operating display as shown

at right.

- The frequency is set on the receiving

status in the status display or the

operating display. For details, see

"4.3.1 Setting the communication

frequencies" and "4.3.2 Setting the

communication channels".

- See the frequency for making calls

in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel

list (TEL/CW/TLX)".

4

4.

.

Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by

turning the volume control.

5

5.

.

Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate

reception level.

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4360.0

4068.0

ITU- 402

Operation

4-9

6

6.

.

Press the key to tune the antenna.

- T blinks if the transmission frequency

is not tuned.

- Even if T is not displayed, tune the

antenna before making a call.

- T lights during tuning. It goes out

after tuning.

7

7.

.

Lift the handset from the cradle.

8

8.

.

Press the PTT key to talk.

The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to

show the equipment is transmitting. Releasing the

PTT key returns it to receiving.

Pressing the PTT key turns on the power

to the PA automatically.

9

9.

.

When finished communicating, return the

handset to the cradle.

■ Making a radiotelephone call ■

1

1.

.

Set a frequency the station to be called is monitoring.

2

2.

.

Lift the handset from the cradle.

3

3.

.

Press the PTT key, check that TX and ON are displayed and make a call as described

below.

z Say the name of the station being called ... Repeat 3 times.

z Say "This is..."

z Say own ship name ... Repeat 3 times.

z If necessary, indicate your working frequency.

z "over"

4

4.

.

Release the PTT key to listen.

5

5.

.

Start communicating according to the response. When changing frequencies, make

sure that no other stations are using the indicated working channel.

- When transmitting from your own station, always press the PTT key while talking.

- On a simplex channel, always say "over" just before releasing the PTT key.

- Always say "out" when terminating communications.

Note

ANT

TUNE

Note

Operation

4-10

4.2.4 Communicating in CW mode

Use a CW keyer to communicate in CW mode.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

When operating on a controller without

access rights (OCC is displayed), press the

jog dial to obtain the access rights.

Unless the controller with access rights is being

used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC

display on the screen disappears.

2

2.

.

Press the CW key.

¾ The communication mode is set to CW and

the previous frequency (or the default

frequency at just after turning on) is set.

¾ Pressing the CW key again turns the

power to the PA on and off.

¾ If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed

as shown at right.

3

3.

.

Set the frequency for making calls in CW

mode.

- When setting a frequency, the screen

becomes operating display as shown

at right.

- The frequency is set on the receiving

status in the status display. For

details, see "4.3.1 Setting the

communication frequencies" and

"4.3.2 Setting the communication

channels".

- See the frequency for making calls

in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel

list (TEL/CW/TLX)".

4

4.

.

Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by

turning the volume control.

5

5.

.

Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate

reception level.

CW ITU- 401

4182.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Note

Operation

4-11

6

6.

.

Press the key to tune the antenna.

- T blinks if the transmission frequency

is not tuned.

- Even if T is not displayed, tune the

antenna before making a call.

- T lights during tuning. It goes out

after tuning.

7

7.

.

Communicate in CW mode using the CW

keyer connected to the KEY jack on the

controller as shown in the figure to the right.

The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to

show the equipment is transmitting.

- After keying on, turns on the PA

power automatically.

- For the sidetone setting, see "5.3.2

Sound settings".

Note

ANT

TUNE

Operation

4-12

4.2.5 Receiving AM broadcasts

It is possible to listen to the radio in AM mode.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

When operating on a controller without

access rights (OCC is displayed), press the

jog dial to obtain the access rights.

Unless the controller with access rights is

being used, the access rights are acquired

and the OCC display on the screen

disappears.

2

2.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio

operation.

3

3.

.

Move the cursor to 3. Mode, and press

ENT.

Move the cursor to the right as shown in the

figure at right to select a communication mode.

4

4.

.

Turn the jog dial to select AM, and press

ENT.

The communication mode is set to AM and the

previous frequency (or the default frequency at

just after turning on) is set.

5

5.

.

Press the MENU key twice to return to the

status display and if required, input an AM

broadcast frequency using the numeric keys.

Then press ENT to receive the broadcast.

- Adjust the reception level and

volume by turning the VOL and RF

GAIN knobs according to the

reception conditions.

- The AM mode is for reception only so a

transmission frequency is not shown.

Additionally, if AM is selected during

blinking “T” (ATU does not tuned), the

condition remains even after changing

to the AM mode.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz

5)Radio operation

1.User channel list

2.ITU channel list

3.Mode :TEL

4.Receiver

5.Transmitter

0.Back

1.User channel list

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz

5)Radio operation

1.User channel list

2.ITU channel list

3.Mode :TEL

4.Receiver

5.Transmitter

0.Back

TEL

Operation

4-13

4.2.6 Communicating in telex mode (TLX)

When communicating in the telex mode, the data terminal is used. In the telex communication,

the ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) mode and FEC (Forward Error Correction) mode are

available to communicate between two stations and to broadcast respectively. Additionally in the

FEC mode, there are two modes of the CFEC (Collective Forward Error Correction) mode for

unspecified receivers and SFEC (Selective Forward Error Correction) mode for specified

receivers, which are selectable according to the purpose.

After starting the telex communication, always use the data terminal until to stop it even

though the controller can terminate that communication with END option forcibly.

4

4.

.2

2.

.6

6.

.1

1

ARQ mode operation

To start the ARQ communication, make a call of the station by inputting the SELCAL number (4

digits for the coast station, 5 digits for the ship station or 9 digits) and the work frequency. After

initiating the call, when receiving the response from the called station and the communication

channel is established, the ARQ communication will be available.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î ARQ with Enter key.

¾ The registered station list is

displayed.

¾ When selecting [Manual] on

this station list, the ID and

frequency or ITU channel

can be input manually.

Attention

Operation

4-14

3

3.

.

Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.

¾ The frequency list of the selected

radio station is displayed.

¾ If the position of the station is

registered, the MUF (maximum

usable frequency) is displayed in the

lowest line as a reference to select

the frequency. Also, the MUF can be

calculated by the menu of Service Î

MUF calculation.

4

4.

.

Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key.

¾ The selected frequency is set and the

antenna is tuned to the frequency.

¾ The message as shown at right is

displayed to confirm that the channel

is busy.

5

5.

.

Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.

Calling of the station is started

with the ARQ mode.

6

6.

.

When receiving the periodic reply from the called station and the communication

channel is established, th e ARQ communication will be available.

¾ The screen as shown at

right is displayed.

¾ If receiving no response

within one minute, the

calling will be ceased

automatically. In this case,

the same call is inhibited

for about one minute.

Frequency list

Name : [Station 01 ] ID : [004310123] Loc : [N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12']

No. Tx.F Rx.F No. Tx.F Rx.F

1 4202.5 4202.5 11 22354.5 22354.5 [Set]

2 4205.0 4205.0 12 25193.0 25193.0 [Print]

3 6300.5 6300.5 13 25208.0 25208.0 [Cancel]

4 6303.0 6303.5 14

5 8396.5 8396.5 15

6 8399.0 8399.0 16

7 12560.0 12560.0 17

8 16785.0 16785.0 18

9 18893.0 18893.0 19

10 22352.0 22352.0 20

MUF: 9MHz, Range: 2537Miles, Sunspot: 14

1 4202.5 4202.5

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

ST-BY

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

ARQ: 20 AUG,2010 17:15

Station:[Station 01] ID:[004310123] Loc:[N33ﾟ45'E138ﾟ12']

*Waiting for transmitter ready

*Received TX-READY signal

F10 Stop

Free sig. ARQ Calling Send Phasing Repeat Traf

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

Station ID:[004310123]

TELEX Terminal Window

ARQ

Message start...

Free sig. ARQ Calling Send Rephasing Repeat Traf

Operation

4-15

7

7.

.

The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the

characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.

¾ In the ARQ mode, it is

possible to alternate the

information sending station

(ISS) and the information

receiving station (IRS).

¾ While “Send” is displayed on

the segment that shows the

operation status, the own

station is ISS and able to

send a message.

¾ After sending a message,

send “+?” to give the sending

right to the IRS.

¾ While the condition is IRS, the

sending right can be acquired

by pressing F5 Over without

waiting for “+?” from ISS.

Further, refer to the chapter 2

for other function keys.

¾ Besides alphabets and the

figures, following signs can

be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +

Note: As the alphabets, capital

letters only are available.

8

8.

.

To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.

¾ When receiving the reply to the

request for the end of

communication, returns to the

standby condition.

¾ F10 Stop is always available

while communicating regardless

of ISS/ IRS. Note that if

pressing the F10 key during

IRS condition, the station

becomes ISS temporally to

send the end of communication.

¾ When pressing the F10 Stop

key during sending a message,

the sending message buffer is

cleared at once and initiates

the end of communication

process.

¾ When POLL is set at IRS and

the end of communication is

requested by ISS, the IRS can

acquire the sending right

without ending the

communication.

When receiving the ARQ call from another station during standby condition, the

operation under the communication is basically similar.

Note

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

Station ID:[004310123]

TELEX Terminal Window

ARQ

Message start...

THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 1234567890.

END OF TEST

Free sig. ARQ Calling Send Rephasing Repeat Traf

Operation

4-16

4

4.

.2

2.

.6

6.

.2

2

CFEC mode operation

（１） Sending with CFEC

Messages can be sent as a broadcast on the selected work frequency using the CFEC mode.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î CFEC with Enter key.

¾ Input the frequency or ITU

channel on the screen as

shown at right.

¾ To input the frequency, press

Enter key to move the cursor to

the right.

¾ To input the ITU channel, select

the ITU channel button and press

Enter key to display the specific

screen as shown at right. Then

press Enter key to move the

cursor to the right.

3

3.

.

Input the work frequency or ITU channel, and press Enter key.

¾ The selected frequency is set and the

antenna is tuned to the frequency.

¾ The message as shown at right is

displayed to confirm that the channel

is busy.

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Operation

4-17

4

4.

.

Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.

Sending the phasing signal is

started with the CFEC mode.

5

5.

.

After sending the phasing signal for about 15 seconds, the message sending using

the CFEC mode will be available.

The screen as shown at right

is displayed.

6

6.

.

The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the

characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.

¾ Refer to the chapter 2 for the

function key.

¾ Besides alphabets and the

figures, following signs can

be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +

Note: Only the capital letter

can be used for the

alphabet.

Operation

4-18

7

7.

.

To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.

¾ After sending the end of

communication for about five

seconds, returns to the

standby condition.

¾ When pressing the F10 Stop

key during sending a

message, the sending

message buffer is cleared at

once and initiates the end of

communication process.

（２） Receiving CFEC broadcasting

CFEC broadcasting messages can be received on the selected work frequency.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Î Tx/Rx frequency set with

Enter key.

¾ The screen as shown at right

is displayed.

¾ To input the frequency, press

Enter key to move the cursor

to the right.

¾ To select the frequency from

the frequency list, select

Tune Î Frequency list and

open the frequency list of

either one of radio stations.

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

ST-BY

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

CFEC: 20 AUG,2010 17:15

*Waiting for transmitter ready

*Received TX-READY signal

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.

File manager.

File

Free sig. ST-BY Calling Receive Rephasing Repeat Traf

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Operation

4-19

3

3.

.

Input the receiving frequency of the CFEC broadcasting, and press Enter key.

The antenna is tuned to the frequency

and the message as shown at right is

displayed.

The transmitting frequency is set simultaneously by the above procedure, but in

this case the frequency is meaningless. So selecting Yes and pressing Enter

would be right.

4

4.

.

When receiving the phasing signal, initiates the CFEC receiving condition.

The segment of the operation

status shows receiving the

phasing signal.

5

5.

.

When receiving the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed),

initiates the message reception.

¾ All of the characters displayed

on the screen are printed out

on the printer.

¾ If detected the character error,

the error correction with the

time-diversity is performed,

but upon the channel quality,

the error would be beyond the

capacity and the error code

(asterisk) would be displayed.

¾ To finish the reception, press

F10 Stop key. Note that, if

receiving the phasing signal

continuously, the CFEC

receiving would be restarted

just after finishing.

- If the "Collective FEC receiving” setting (System Î NBDP setup) is off,

neither the CFEC broadcasting nor the SFEC broadcasting are received.

- Receiving the CFEC broadcasting can be started even if on the way of the

message because the phasing signal would be interrupted for every 100

characters. Afterwards, the reception of the message starts as soon as

detecting the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed).

Note

Operation

4-20

4

4.

.2

2.

.6

6.

.3

3

SFEC mode operation

Messages can be sent to the specific stations as a broadcast on the selected work frequency

using the SFEC mode. Additionally, regarding the SFEC reception, refer to the previous section

because it is similar to the CFEC reception.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î SFEC with Enter key.

¾ The registered station list is

displayed.

¾ When selecting [Manual] on

this station list, the ID and

frequency or ITU channel

can be input manually.

3

3.

.

Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.

¾ The frequency list of the selected

radio station is displayed.

¾ If the position of the station is

registered, the MUF (maximum

usable frequency) is displayed in

the lowest line as a reference to

select the frequency. Also, the

MUF can be calculated by the

menu of Service Î MUF

calculation.

Station selection

No. Station Name ID Location F.Sig

1 Station 01 004310123 N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12' DOTDOT [Select]

2 Station 02 004311234 N37ﾟ22' E135ﾟ51' DOTDOT [Manual]

3 Station 03 431012345 [Cancel]

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 ↓

1 Station 01 004310123 N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12' DOTDOT

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Operation

4-21

4

4.

.

Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key.

¾ The selected frequency is set and the

antenna is tuned to the frequency.

¾ The message as shown at right is

displayed to confirm that the channel

is busy.

5

5.

.

Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.

¾ The SFEC broadcasting is

started.

¾ First, the phasing signal same

with CFEC mode is sent.

6

6.

.

After sending the phasing signal followed by the SELCAL number, the message

sending using the SFEC mode will be available.

The screen as shown at right

is displayed.

The following procedure is the same as the CFEC mode.

Note

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

Station ID:[004310123]

TELEX Terminal Window

ARQ

Message start...

F3 Hereis | F4 TMS | F8 F.Send | F10 Stop

Free sig. SFEC Calling Send Rephasing Repeat RQ

Operation

4-22

4

4.

.2

2.

.6

6.

.4

4

Editing telex messages

When communicating in the telex mode, the message file can be sent, which is prepared

beforehand as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in the

telex mode, except when the

controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select File Î Edit new file with Enter key.

¾ The editing screen is

displayed as shown at right.

¾ To edit an existing file, select

File Î Edit existing file.

3

3.

.

Make the message with the keyboard.

¾ Besides alphabets and the figures, following signs can be input from the keyboard.

- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +

¾ Only the capital letter can be used for the alphabet.

¾ When the number of characters for each line becomes more than 70 or a specified number,

line feed is automatically inserted.

¾ When pressing the Tab key, inserts the space of the number set by F2 Set tab is inserted.

4

4.

.

Press F9 (Save & Quit) key when saving the message the file and finishing editing.

After closing the editing screen, returns to the regular screen.

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

Editing telex file:001.TLX Line: 1 Column: 1 Size: 0 Insert On

[End of File]

F1:Insert Off F2:Ins_Line F3:Block F4:Del_Word F5:Del_Line

F7:Quit F8:Save As F9:Save & Quit F10: - Others -

Operation

4-23

- The function keys available for the edit screen and the content are as follows.

● Group 1

・ F1 ：Insert On/Off ··············· Sets the input condition to the insert mode by

pressing it while Insert On is displayed. And sets the

input condition to the overwrite mode by pressing it

while Insert Off is displayed. Current conditions are

indicated on the upper-right corner of the screen.

・ F2 ：Ins_Line······················ Add a line to the line of the cursor position.

・ F3 ：Block ·························· Indicates the following block menu.

・ Top-marker of block:

Specifies the cursor position for a starting point

of the block.

・ Bottom-marker of block:

Specifies the cursor position for a ending point

of the block.

・ Remove markers:

Releases the specification of the block.

・ Copy Block:

Copies and pastes the character string specified

in the block onto the cursor position.

・ Move block:

Moves the character string specified in the block

to the line position of the cursor.

・ Delete block:

Deletes the character string specified in the

block.

・ Go to the block:

Moves the cursor to the starting point of the

block.

・ F4 ：Del_Word ···················· Deletes the word at the cursor position.

・ F5 ：Del_Line ····················· Deletes the line at the cursor position.

・ F6 ：（ N/A）

・ F7 ：Quit ···························· Finishes editing without saving the message file.

・ F8 ：Save As ······················ Saves the message file with the new name.

・ F9 ：Save & Quit ················ Saves the message file by overwriting and finishes

editing.

・ F10 ：- Others - ···················· Assigns the group 2 to the function keys.

● Group 2

・ F1 ：Max Column ················ Specifies the column width of a line.

・ F2 ：Set Tab ······················· Specifies the tab position on the edit screen.

・ F3 ：Undo_Char ·················· Insert the character erased at the end to the cursor

position.

・ F4 ：Undo_Word ················· Insert the word erased with F4 Del_Word to the

cursor position.

・ F5 ：Undo_Line ·················· Insert the line erased with F5 Del_Line to the line of

the cursor position.

・ F6 ：Merge File ·················· Selects an existing message file to merge to the

message file under the edit.

・ F7 ：Find ···························· Searches a specified character string.

・ F8 ：Print_out ····················· Prints the message file under the edit.

・ F9 ：Find/Replace ··············· Searches a specified character string and replaces it

with another character string.

・ F10 ：- Others - ···················· Assigns the group 1 to the function keys.

Note

Operation

4-24

- Besides editing messages mentioned above, the following items in the file

menu concerning to the message files are available.

・ Rename file ·········· Changes the name of the file saved in flash

ROM(C:) or USB memory (A:) .

・ Delete file ············· Deletes the file saved in the flash ROM (C:) or the

USB memory (A:) .

・ Copy file ··············· Copies a file (32kB or less) saved in the flash

ROM (C:) or the USB memory (A:) to another

folder or drive.

・ Initialize USB ········ Formats the attached USB memory (A:) .

・ Remove USB ········· Unmounts the USB drive (A:) to remove the

attached USB memory.

- The maximum size of the message file is 8192 bytes.

- The maximum number of the message files saved in the TEXT folder is one

hundred.

- When naming or renaming a filename, the space character is unavailable for

the character string.

Operation

4-25

4.3 Setting the radio

This section describes how to set the communication frequencies and how to use the receiver

and transceiver functions.

4.3.1 Setting the communication frequencies

Use the free frequency input mode to input the communication frequencies directly.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

In the status display, use the numeric keypad

to input the frequency.

- When 1 is input using the numeric

keypad, it appears on the far right as

shown in the screen on the right.

- In the user/ITU channel input mode,

press the CH key once or twice to

hide the channel display.

2

2.

.

Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and

press ENT.

The transmission frequency input mode opens as

shown in the screen at right.

For a simplex frequency, press ENT to

automatically input the same frequency

as the receiving frequency to complete

communication frequency settings.

3

3.

.

Input the transmission frequency in the

same way as the reception frequency.

4

4.

.

Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and

press ENT.

The communication frequency settings are

complete and the screen shows the operating

display.

- Turning the jog dial on the status display changes the reception frequency on

the 0.1 kHz scale. For simplex frequencies, the transmission frequency is

changed at the same time.

- The above operation is also available on the transceiver setting screen of the

operating display.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The telex frequency is

set with the menu of the data terminal, as Tune Î Tx/Rx frequency set.

Note

TEL -----.1

2331.5

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

TEL

12345.0

-----.-

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

TEL

12345.0

---12.3

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx:12345.0/Tx:12345.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

12345.0

Operation

4-26

4.3.2 Setting the communication channels

Besides the free frequencies described previously, ITU channel mode and user channel modes

can also be set. The ITU channel mode is mode for using channels based on the international

standard and is built-in to the equipment. The user channel mode is the mode for using channels

on pre-registered frequencies. These modes can be used according to the operations.

(1) Selecting a frequency and channel input mode

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Set the screen of the status display or the

operating display.

The operating display at right shows free frequency

mode.

2

2.

.

Press the CH key.

As shown below, each time the CH key is pressed the mode changes in order from the free

frequency mode, ITU channel mode, to the user channel mode.

(Free frequency input mode)

(ITU channel mode) (User channel mode)

- If changed to the ITU channel mode, the communication mode of the free

frequency input mode and the previous (or lowest) ITU channel number are

applied.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode.

- If the communication mode is changed by pressing the TEL, DSC, or CW keys,

the free frequency input mode is set.

Note

CHCH

CH

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4360.0

4068.0

ITU- 402

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4357.0

4065.0

U01- 001

Operation

4-27

(2) Setting the ITU channels

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

After setting the TEL, DSC or CW modes,

press the CH key to set the display to the

ITU channel mode.

2

2.

.

Input the channel by using the numeric

keypad.

When 4 is input using the numeric

keypad, it appears on the far right

as shown in the screen on the right.

3

3.

.

Input the rest of the digits and press ENT.

The input ITU channel frequency is displayed

and the settings are complete.

- See the appendix "11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)" for a list of

pre-installed ITU channels and their frequencies.

- Besides doing settings with the numeric keypad, settings can also be done with

the jog dial.

- For DSC mode, normally perform the above procedure to receive the routine

message. Furthermore, when sending a DSC message, the calling frequency is

set via the menu automatically and the above procedure is not needed.

- The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The ITU channel in the

telex mode is set with the controller menu 5.2 ITU channel list, or the data

terminal menu operation, as Tune Î ITU channel set.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4360.0

4068.0

ITU- 4

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4357.0

4065.0

ITU- 401

Operation

4-28

(3) Setting user channels

A total of 20 groups with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered on

the equipment. This section explains how to set channels that are already registered.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Use the CH key to set the display to the user

channel mode status display.

2

2.

.

Pressing ENT causes the channel group

number to blink so a channel group can be

input.

Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the

number of a registered group.

When 2 is input using the numeric

keypad, it appears on the far right

as shown in the screen on the right.

3

3.

.

After inputting a group number, pressing ENT

causes the channel number to blink so a user

channel can be input.

Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the

number of a registered channel.

When 3 is input using the numeric

keypad, it appears on the far right

as shown in the screen on the right.

4

4.

.

Input the rest of the digits and press ENT.

¾ The input user channel frequency is

displayed and the settings are complete.

¾ The group name is displayed for 3 seconds

after the settings are done.

- Channels can be set directly in the status display or the operating display by

using the numeric keypad or the jog dial without setting a channel group. After

inputting with the numeric keypad, press ENT.

- See "5.4 Registering user channels" for how to register frequencies to user

channels.

- The user channel of the telex mode is set with the menu of the data terminal,

as Tune Î Frequency list.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

Communicating on

TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz

Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.

[HLD][END]

AA

TEL

4357.0

4065.0

U20- 3

Operation

4-29

(4) Using channel lists

Besides the procedure above, user channels (except the telex mode) and ITU channels can also

be set from the channel lists (5.1 User channel list or 5.2 ITU channel list). This section explains

how to set channels that are already registered from the user channel list.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio

operation.

2

2.

.

Select 1. User channel list and press ENT.

The user channel list index (group list) as

shown at right is displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the intended channel group and press

ENT.

The user channel list as shown at right is

displayed.

4

4.

.

Select the channel to set and press ENT.

The user channel settings are complete, the

status display is displayed.

5) Radio operation

1.User channel list

2.ITU channel list

3.Mode :TEL

4.Receiver

5.Transmitter

0.Back

5.1)User channel list (index)

No CH group name Type

01 JRC Tokyo TEL

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Pacific ABC CW

5.1)User channel list (table)

Name: JRC Tokyo

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

001 4357.0 4065.0 TEL

002

003

004

005

006

4360.0

4363.0

4366.0

4369.0

4372.0

4068.0

4071.0

4074.0

4077.0

4080.0

TEL

Operation

4-30

4.3.3 Setting the automatic gain control (AGC)

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 5.4 Receiver.

2

2.

.

Select 1. Auto gain control and press ENT,

when the cursor moves to the right use the jog

dial to select Slow, Fast, or OFF.

After selecting and pressing ENT, the

settings are complete.

The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the

5AGC key at the same time.

4.3.4 Setting the noise reduction (NR)

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 2. Noise

reduction.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,

then use the jog dial to select NR1, NR2,

BC, or OFF.

After selecting and pressing ENT, the

settings are complete.

- The various settings are shown below.

・NR1： Noise reduction (low)

・NR2： Noise reduction (high)

・BC： Beat canceller

- The same settings can be done by

pressing and holding the FUNC key

and the 3NR key at the same time.

- This function is invalid in DSC mode or

telex mode. Moreover, the beat

canceller becomes invalid in CW mode.

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Fast

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :NR1

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

Note

Operation

4-31

4.3.5 Setting the attenuation (ATT)

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 3.

Attenuation.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,

then use the jog dial to select 6dB, 12dB,

18dB, or OFF.

After selecting and pressing ENT, the

settings are complete.

The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the

4ATT key at the same time.

4.3.6 Setting the clarifier

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 4. Clarifier.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then

use the jog dial or numeric keypad to select a

value in the range of -200 to +200 Hz.

After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings

are complete.

- When using the numeric keypad,

input "+" with the 1CLAR key and "-"

with the 2SCAN key.

- Pressing and holding the FUNC key

and the 1CLAR key at the same time

opens a popup screen. The same

settings can be done here.

- This function is invalid in the DSC

mode or the telex mode.

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :6dB

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+008Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

Note

Operation

4-32

4.3.7 Setting the squelch level

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 5. Squelch.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,

then use the jog dial or numeric keypad to

input a value in the range of 000 to 100.

After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings

are complete.

- Setting the value to 000 automatically

displays it as OFF.

- This function is invalid in the DSC

mode or the telex mode.

4.3.8 Setting the CW bandwidth

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 6. CW

bandwidth.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,

then use the jog dial to select Wide or

Narrow.

After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings

are complete.

This function is enabled in CW mode

only.

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :012

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

Note

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

Note

Operation

4-33

4.3.9 Scanning the Rx frequencies

（１） Scanning of channels in TEL/DSC/CW mode

The scanning of channels in the TEL/DSC/CW mode is started with the controller.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver

appears, move the cursor to 7. Scan.

2

2.

.

Press ENT to confirm the selection.

The group list as shown at right is displayed.

- The previous scan can be restarted

by pressing and holding the FUNC

key and then pressing the

2SCAN key on the status display.

- If the user channel is not registered,

scan cannot be done so the screen

shown at right is not displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the channel group to scan with the

cursor and press ENT.

The popup screen as shown at right is

displayed.

If the popup screen shown at right

is displayed during scanning, Stop

appears instead of Execute.

4

4.

.

Select 1. Execute and press ENT, the screen

at right is displayed and scanning starts.

¾ To check the registered channels in the

channel group, select 2. User channel list

and press ENT.

¾ To change the scanning speed, select 3.

Scan speed (sec) and press ENT. The setting

range is 0.3 to 9.9 seconds, the same as

TEL/DSC/CW.

- Scanning can be done regardless of the squelch being set to open or close.

When pressing the PTT or keying the CW keyer, or when squelch is opened

after closing condition, scanning stops momentarily and the icon starts

blinking. In this case the scanning can be restarted by pressing ENT.

- To stop scanning, press the CANCEL key.

- When scanning to receive routine DSC calls, set the scan speed to 0.3

seconds within 6 channels.

Note: If too many channels are being scanned, it may not catch the reception.

5.4)Receiver

1.Auto gain control :Slow

2.Noise reduction :OFF

3.Attenuation :OFF

4.Clarifier :+000Hz

5.Squelch :OFF

6.CW bandwidth :Narrow

7.Scan

0.Back

5.4.7)Scan

No CH group name Type

01 JRC Tokyo TEL

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Pacific ABC CW

5.4.7)Scan

No CH group name Type

01 JRC Tokyo TEL

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Pacific ABC CW

1. Execute

2. User channel list

3. Scan speed (sec)

TEL DSC CW

3.0 0.3 3.0

Note

TEL

4357.0

-----.-

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

JRC Tokyo

U01- 001

Operation

4-34

（２） Scanning of channels in telex mode

The scanning of channels in the telex mode is started with the data terminal.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Î Scanning start with Enter

key.

The registered station list is

displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the radio station having the channel group to be scanned with the cursor, and

press Enter key.

The antenna is tuned to the

every frequency registered in

the selected radio station. The

screen at right is displayed

while tuning the antenna.

4

4.

.

After completing the antenna tuning, scanning starts.

¾ The screen as shown at right

is displayed while scanning.

¾ When receiving a call by the

ARQ or FEC mode, scanning

stops and the communication

starts. After finishing the

communication, scanning

restarts automatically.

¾ The scanning speed can be

changed with the menu on the

regular screen, as System Î

Scan speed.

¾ When breaking the scanning,

select Tune Î Scanning stop.

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

[TLX] Tx=-----.-kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

ST-BY

No. Station:[Station 01 ] ID:[004310123] TUNER :[-----]

01 Location:[N33ﾟ45'E138ﾟ12'] F.Sig:[DOTDOT] Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.

File manager.

File

Free sig. ST-BY Calling Receive Rephasing Repeat Traf

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Operation

4-35

4.3.10 Reducing the Tx power

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 5.5

Transmitter.

2

2.

.

Select 1. Power and press ENT to move

the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial

to select Medium or Low.

After selecting and pressing ENT, the

settings are complete.

- The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the

9 key at the same time.

- When the Tx power is reduced, M or L is displayed on the screen.

4.3.11 Setting the antenna tuning power

■ Procedure ■

On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 2. Tune power and press ENT

to move the cursor to the right, then select a value from 0 to 3 with the jog dial.

¾ The antenna tune output grows larger by about 5W step.

¾ The factory default setting is 0 (Normal).

¾ After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete.

4.3.12 Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function

■ Procedure ■

On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 3. Auto tune start and press

ENT to move the cursor to the right, then set to ON or OFF with the jog dial.

¾ After setting to ON, when pressing the PTT key under the following condition in TEL mode,

the antenna tuner starts tuning automatically.

- When the Tx frequency is untuned, or

- when the PA power is not turned on, i.e. the ON is not displayed.

¾ This ATS setting data is saved in the controller. Therefore if two controllers are connected,

this function can be set to the controllers respectively.

Note

PWR

RDC

5.5)Transmitter

1.Power :High

2.Tune power :Normal

3.Auto tune start :ON

0.Back

5.5)Transmitter

1.Power :Low

2.Tune power :Normal

3.Auto tune start :ON

0.Back

Operation

4-36

4.4 Basic DSC operations

When calling stations, the DSC is also available for a routine, safety, urgency call, or a distress

alert. This section describes basics of how to use the DSC to make routine calls.

4.4.1 Routine calls to an individual station

For radiotelephone or telex communication, a DSC routine call to the station to be called can be

made as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

On the status display or operation display,

holding down the MENU key, press 1CLAR key

to open “1. DSC non-distress call”.

The screen as shown at right is displayed. The

calling FRQ of 2177.0 kHz is the prescribed default

value. But the working FRQ (MF) is rewritable.

If no data is shown in the working FRQ field

just after turning on, please contact JRC or

our agency to register the nonvolatile data.

In this case, the input MF data is stored

temporarily as the volatile data.

2

2.

.

Input the destination address.

- If inputting the 9 digits MMSI manually, use

the numeric keypad or the jog dial, or

- If the DSC call list is already prepared, press

ENT to open the station list as shown at right

and select the receiver from the list.

3

3.

.

The cursor is focused on the Call. To make

a call without changing the parameters,

press ENT.

- To change the DSC calling frequency, select the

Calling FRQ and press ENT to open the DSC call

list as shown at right, if already prepared. But in

this case if inputting manually, press CANCEL

key to close the list and, input the proper DSC

frequencies in conformity with regulations.

- After changing the DSC calling frequency on HF,

the working frequency is automatically selected

within upto 10 seconds. However if no frequency

is detected or if another frequency is needed,

manually inputting the frequency is also

available.

- To check the details of the message, press

ENT on the Preview menu to open the screen

as shown at right (bottom).

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

No Station name MMSI

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

JRC MITAKA1

JRC MITAKA2

JRC MITAKA3

JRC MITAKA4

JRC MITAKA5

JRC MITAKA6

JRC MITAKA7

123456789

431012345

431123456

431234567

431000123

004310014

431888888

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

Address :[123456789]

Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Format :Individual

Address :123456789

Category :Routine

Self-ID :431001234

Telecommand1:Radiotelephone

Telecommand2:No information

Working FRQ :Tx 2150.0kHz

Rx 2150.0kHz

[Call] [Return] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]

JRC MITAKA1 123456789

No RX[kHz] TX[kHz] Category

01

02

03

04

05

06

2177.0

4208.0

4208.5

4209.0

6313.0

6313.5

2177.0

4208.0

4208.5

4209.0

6313.0

6313.5

RTN

Note

Operation

4-37

4

4.

.

The operating display is appeared and

initiates the DSC call.

After checking the channel free condition, sends

the message and waits for the acknowledgement.

During waiting for the acknowledgement,

the handling menus are available for

the following purposes.

Note) To focus the cursor on it, use

FUNC key to move the active screen

area.

- RTRY ... Resends the message.

- INF ...... Indicates the message contents.

- HLD ..... Makes the event on hold.

- END .... Terminates the event.

5

5.

.

When receiving the acknowledgement

the ALM lamp starts blinking, and the

receiving alarm gradually grows louder.

¾ Pressing CANCEL key or ENT silences the

alarm.

¾ The radiotelephone frequency is set and the

antenna is tuned automatically.

6

6.

.

When requested the radiotelephone

communication, start the communication

with the handset.

- After completing the routine individual call where the ARQ or FEC is specified,

the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be

started with the data terminal.

- If the MMSI of the coast station is input at Address, the working frequency is

specified by the coast station. Thus the Working FRQ line is disappeared.

- If the receiver is unable to comply with the call, own station may receive one of

the following acknowledgements. (* are coast stations only) In this case, wait

and retry the call again later, if possible, according to the message.

No reason/ No reason given No operator/ No operator available

Congestion/ Congestion at maritime switching centre * Temp no operator/ Operator temporarily unavailable

Busy/ Busy EQP disabled/ Equipment disabled

Queue/ Queue indication

Unable FRQ/ Unable to use proposed channel

Barred/ Station barred

Unable mode/ Unable to use proposed channel

Note

DSC

2177.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN

Waiting for CH free

Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Rx 2150.0kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

A A

DSC

2177.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK

Acknowledged(00.2min)

Rx FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

A A

TEL

2150.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK

Ready to talk(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

[INF][HLD][END]

A A

Note

Operation

4-38

4.4.2 Receiving routine individual calls

When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message,

perform the following procedures as appropriate.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

The screen at right is displayed, and the

ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows

louder gradually.

¾ The example message contains the following

information.

- Message type: Routine individual call

- Caller's MMSI: 123456789

¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the

received message automatically.

2

2.

.

Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the

alarm, then the screen at right is displayed.

3

3.

.

Press FUNC key or ENT to move the focused

screen to the operation control screen and

select the option to handle the procedure.

Options shown at right are as follows.

ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement.

NCK Sends a reply as “unable to comply”.

Note) Select the unable reason on the

popup screen at right.

NEW ...... Sends acknowledgement with a new channel.

INF ........ Indicates the receiving message.

HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold.

END ...... Terminates the procedure.

4

4.

.

When sending the acknowledgement for

communication, select ACK and press ENT.

¾ Instead of selecting ACK, lifting the handset

from the cradle is also available.

¾ The equipment waits for the channel free

condition as shown at right. After checking it,

the acknowledgement is sent immediately.

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|RTN

Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

DSC

2177.0

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|RTN

Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

[ACK][NCK][NEW][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2177.0

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|RTN

Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

[ACK][NCK][NEW][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2177.0

[ACK]

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK

Waiting for CH free

Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2177.0

A A

Operation

4-39

5

5.

.

After sending an acknowledgement, the

working frequency is set to communicate.

In TEL mode, start communicating using the

handset.

- After completing the DSC call sequence specifying the ARQ or FEC, the telex

mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started

with the data terminal.

- If the receiving call is not the above mentioned call which requests TEL or

TLX communication but a polling call, the screen as follows is shown and, the

ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. In this case, after

silencing the alarm, select ACK to acknowledge it.

Additionally note that if it is received while the 7.5.1.3 Polling call of the

Automatic ACK menu is set to ON, and there is no active procedure, this call

can be acknowledged automatically.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK

Acknowledged(00.5min)

Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

TEL

2150.0

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:001234567|IND|RTN POLL

Waiting to send ACK(00.5min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

[ACK][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2177.0

2189.5

A A

Operation

4-40

4.4.3 Routine group calls

For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC routine call to a group of ships is available.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

On the menu “1. DSC non-distress call”

mentioned above, set the Call type on the

menu shown at right to RTN/Group/TEL or

RTN/Group/FEC.

2

2.

.

Input the Address, and frequency if required.

And then press ENT on the Call to start

sending the group call.

3

3.

.

After finishing the transmission, the working

frequency is set immediately.

In TEL mode, start broadcasting using the

handset.

After completing the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set

to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started with the data

terminal.

4.4.4 Receiving routine group calls

■ Procedure ■

The screen at right is displayed, and the

ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder

gradually.

If no procedure exists, starts operating the

received message, i.e. the specified working

frequency is set automatically. Then press

CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the

broadcasting.

When receiving the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to

the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal.

Note

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

Note

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]

Address :[012345678]

Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:012345678|GRP|RTN

Ready for broadcast(00.5min)

Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz

TEL :Rx -----.-/Tx 2150.0kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

TEL

2150.0

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|GRP|RTN

Ready for listening(00.5min)

RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz

TEL :RX 2150.0/TX -----.-kHz

[INF][HLD][END]

TEL

2150.0

A A

Operation

4-41

4.5 Emergency calls (DSC distress/urgency/safety calls)

In emergency, the DSC is available for distress, urgency, or safety calls. For safety and urgency

calls, either individual calls or area calls is selectable for the type of call. For distress alerts,

either sending after entering the nature of distress or frequency, or not entering anything is

available. In both cases, pressing the DISTRESS key is required to send the distress alert.

4.5.1 Safety or urgency calls to an individual station

■ Procedure ■

The procedure to send the safety or urgency

individual call is similar to the routine call except

selecting the call type to SAF/Indv/TEL or

URG/Indv/TEL (instead of TEL, ARQ or FEC also

available) and normally using the distress and

safety frequencies prior to other frequencies.

- Both calls of the safety test and the safety position request are described below.

- When calling a coast station with requesting the working frequency, input “0” in

the Tx and Rx frequency input field to send the own position data.

4

4.

.5

5.

.1

1.

.1

1

Special safety individual calls

(1) Safety test calls

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Select SAF/Indv/Test in the Call type field

and input address.

Also change the Calling FRQ if needed.

2

2.

.

Press ENT on the Call to start sending

the safety test call.

After checking the channel free, the safety

test call is sent and the screen at right is

displayed.

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[SAF/Indv/TEL ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[SAF/Indv/Test ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:123456789|IND|SAF Test

Waiting for ACK(00.2min)

Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

Operation

4-42

3

3.

.

When the acknowledgement is received,

the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows

louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key,

the screen becomes as shown at right.

The safety test call process is now complete.

However note that even though the call is sent

normally, the acknowledgement may not be

received from the called station for some reason.

(2) Safety position request calls

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Select SAF/Indv/PosRQ in the Call type

field and input address.

Also change the Calling FRQ if needed.

2

2.

.

Press ENT on the Call to start sending

the safety position request call.

After checking the channel free, the safety

position request call is sent and the screen

at right is displayed.

3

3.

.

When the acknowledgement is received,

the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows

louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key,

the screen becomes as shown at right.

The position data of the station is indicated in

the Position field usually, and this procedure

is complete. However note that even though

the call is sent normally, the acknowledgement

may not be received from the called station for

some reason.

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[SAF/Indv/PosRQ]

Address :[ ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|SAF Test|ACK

Acknowledged(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

[INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:123456789|IND|SAF POS

Waiting for ACK(00.2min)

Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|SAF POS|ACK

Acknowledged(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

Position:21ﾟ28'N/157ﾟ59'W

[INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

Operation

4-43

4.5.2 Receiving safety or urgency individual calls

When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message,

perform the following procedures as appropriate.

■ Procedure ■

The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM

lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the

received message automatically.

¾ Basically similar to the routine individual call

except normally using the distress and safety

frequencies prior to other frequencies.

4

4.

.5

5.

.2

2.

.1

1

Receiving special safety individual calls

(1) Safety test calls

■ Procedure ■

The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM

lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

¾ If received while the 7.5.1.1 Test call of the

Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there is

no active procedure, this call can be

acknowledged automatically.

¾ To acknowledge manually, after silencing the

alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start

sending procedure.

(2) Safety position request calls

■ Procedure ■

The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM

lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.

¾ If received while the 7.5.1.2 Position RQ call of

the Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there

is no active procedure, this call can be

acknowledged automatically.

¾ To acknowledge manually, after silencing the

alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start

sending procedure.

¾ When sending a reply as “unable to comply”,

select NCK to send the acknowledge with no

position data.

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|SAF

Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

TEL

2182.0

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|SAF Test

Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

[ACK][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|IND|SAF POS

Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

[ACK][NCK][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

Operation

4-44

4.5.3 Safety or urgency area calls

For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC safety area call can be made as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

On the menu 1.DSC non-distress call, set the

Call type to SAF/Area/TEL or URG/Area/TEL

(instead of TEL, FEC also available).

The menu becomes as shown at right and

the cursor moves to the Area form.

2

2.

.

Set the area to call.

Input as below according to the Area form settings.

- When Center&rad

・ Enter the center point of the area in Center.

・ Enter the radius of the area in Radius.

- When Corner&dev (shown at right)

・ Enter the northwest corner of the area in

Corner.

・ Enter the south and north/east and west

deviation in a range from 00 to 99 in

Deviation.

3

3.

.

Select the Working FRQ/ Calling FRQ if

needed, then press ENT to start the area call.

4

4.

.

After finishing the transmission, start the

communication with the handset in TEL

mode.

- Incase of the urgency call, to inform receivers of the particular topic,

additional settings such as Medical TRNSP (medical transport ship) or Neutral

ship (neutral nationality) in the Subject field as shown at right are available.

However to use this function, it is needed to set the menu 7.5.4 Medical use or

7.5.5 Neutral use to ON once after powering on the equipment.

- After finishing the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set

to the equipment. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal.

Note

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Center&rad]

- Center :[89ﾟN179ﾟE]

- Radius :[0500NM]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Corner&dev]

- Corner :[ ﾟN ﾟE]

- Deviation:[ ﾟ/ ﾟ]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

1)DSC non-distress call

Call type :[URG/Area/TEL ]

Area form :[Center&rad]

- Center :[89ﾟN179ﾟE]

- Radius :[0500NM]

Subject :[No information]

Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:Area|SAF

Waiting for CH free

Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx -----.-/Tx 2182.0kHz

[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]

DSC

2187.5

A A

Operation

4-45

4.5.4 Receiving safety or urgency area calls

■ Procedure ■

The screen at right is displayed, and the

ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder

gradually.

If no procedure exists, starts operating the

received message, i.e. the specified working

frequency is set automatically. Then press

CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the

broadcasting.

- When receiving the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set

to the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal.

- To check the topic when receiving an urgency area call, select INF menu to

view the detail of the message.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|Area|SAF

Ready for listening(00.2min)

RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx -----.-kHz

[INF][HLD][END]

TEL

2182.0

A A

Operation

4-46

4.5.5 Distress alerts

When in distress, distress alerts are always transmitted by pressing the dedicated DISTRESS

key. The distress alerts transmit your own MMSI, ships position, time of the position, and the

nature of distress.

CAUTION

Do not test the distress alert.

Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers.

When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain

or officer in charge.

If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu

and transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the

controller. And then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue

Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)

Information to be reported:

Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and

reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name

and manufacture number/date, if possible.

4

4.

.5

5.

.5

5.

.1

1

Quick distress alerts

The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert immediately without using menus.

In this case, the nature of distress in the message will be sent as "Undesignated" by default.

Further, if no information for the position and the time of position obtained within 23.5 hours, this

information will be composed automatically.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Open the DISTRESS key cover.

2

2.

.

Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4

seconds until the countdown is completed.

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Distress call starts

in sec

4

Operation

4-47

3

3.

.

After the antenna is tuned, the distress

alert is sent.

The distress alerts are sent on all 6 distress

and safety frequencies.

4

4.

.

The equipment stays in distress mode until

acknowledgement is received or the distress

alert cancelling procedure is complete.

¾ Unless an acknowledgement is received or the

distress alert is cancelled manually, the

distress alert repeats automatically in a

variable interval every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

(The time until next sending is shown at Next.)

¾ The distress alert can be sent manually while

waiting for acknowledgement by the

DISTRESS key operation mentioned above.

¾ While waiting for the acknowledgement, the

radiotelephone communication is available.

Additionally, when focusing the frequencies as

shown at right, the distress and safety

frequency can be changed with the jog dial.

¾ Pressing CANCEL key or ENT moves the

focused screen and makes following options

available.

FRQ ......... Moves the cursor to the frequency section

Pause ...... Makes the distress mode pause.

POS ......... Opens the position input menu

CHNG ...... Changes the distress alert type (Multi/Single mode and the frequencies)

Cancel ..... Starts the distress alert cancelling procedure, which is needed to send the DSC

acknowledgement and to broadcast in the radiotelephone mode from the “own ship”.

Furthermore, if the POS/CHNG is edited, MEM icon is displayed to indicate that there are

some data stored temporarily until resending the distress alert.

5

5.

.

When the acknowledgement is received, the

message is displayed as shown at the right.

¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving

alarm gradually grows louder.

¾ The radiotelephone mode is set to the

distress/safety frequency of the band on which

the acknowledgement is received and antenna

tuning is done immediately.

¾ Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence the

alarm, then call for help with the handset.

Normally, the responding station calls on the

radiotelephone. Then reply to the receipt as

follows.

z Say, "MAYDAY".

z Say, "This is".

z Own ship's MMSI and call sign, position, nature of distress, and rescue requests

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz

Distress calling

Next :---

Stage :Waiting for CH free

Call-F: / / / / /

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[Cancel]

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz

Distress calling

Next :Resends 4.1min later

Stage :Waiting for ACK

Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]

Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|OWN D-ACK|2MHz

DIST acknowledged(00.2min)

T x : 2|4|6|8|12|16/ U ndesignated /TEL

89ﾟ59.0123'N179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

A DST ALT

Operation

4-48

If cancelling the distress alert since a false distress alert is transmitted

accidentally, perform the distress alert cancelling procedure as follows.

1. Press the CANCEL key while

the option selectable screen

is focused.

2. On the popup screen, select

Continue with the jog dial,

and press ENT.

Starts the distress alert cancelling

procedure and sends the DSC

acknowledgements to own ship in

every frequency where distress

alerts are transmitted.

3. After DSC acknowledgements

are complete, the popup screen

is displayed as shown at right.

If the false distress alert indicates

the FEC mode, the popup screen is

displayed as shown at lower right.

In this case, the message for

cancelling distress alert is sent in

the TLX mode automatically

without operating the DTE.

4. According to the guidance on

the screen, broadcast to cancel

the distress alert in TEL mode.

¾ When finishing the broadcast on

a frequency, press ENT to change

to the next frequency.

¾ The cancelled frequency shows

✓

mark.

5. When the cancelling procedure is

completed on every frequency,

displays the operating screen as

shown at right and finishes the

distress mode.

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz

Distress calling

Next :Resends 3.8min later

Stage :Waiting for ACK

Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]

[Cancel]

!!Warning!!

Cancel the transmitted

false distress alert?

(TGT: 2/4/6/8/12/16M)

[Continue] [Return][Return]

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz

Distress cancel calling

Stage :Waiting for CH free

Call-F: / / / / /

Nature:Undesignated

PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59

Mode :Radiotelephone

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 2182.0/Tx: 2182.0kHz

Cancelling the distress alert

Voice cancellation procedure:

All stations. (three times)

This is [NAME][CALL SIGN]

[MMSI][POS&UTC].

Cancel my distress alert of

[DATE][UTC].

Over.

Target: 2/ 4/ 6/ 8/ 12/ 16MHz

*To change the band, press ENT.

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

DSC cancelling calls

are completed. Next,

start the voice cancel

on the required bands

according to the

message on the screen.

[ OK ]

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:All|DST|ACK

Cancelled DISTRESS (00.2min)

Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16

[RTRY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]

A A

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

TEL Rx: 4125.0/Tx: 4125.0kHz

Cancelling the distress alert

Voice cancellation procedure:

All stations. (three times)

This is [NAME][CALL SIGN]

[MMSI][POS&UTC].

Cancel my distress alert of

[DATE][UTC].

Over.

Target: 2/ 4/ 6/ 8/ 12/ 16MHz

*To change the band, press ENT.

4

SIG

WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Operation

4-49

4

4.

.5

5.

.5

5.

.2

2

Distress alerts from the menu

During communicating in telex mode, finish it to enable the menu before practicing below.

The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert with the nature of distress selected

in the menu. Also, besides manually inputting position and the time information, the subsequent

communication mode, the transmission method and frequency can be set here.

Note: Multi-frequency or single frequency can be selected as the transmission method. The

various methods are shown below.

⋅ Multi-frequency method: The distress alert message is sent continuously on each

frequency, 2187.5 kHz, 8414.5 kHz, and at least one

other distress/safety frequency.

⋅ Single frequency method: The same distress alert message is sent on one

distress/safety frequency 5 times continuously. If 2 or

more distress/safety frequencies are selected, the same

message is transmitted 5 times continuously in the same

way on the other frequency after an interval between 3.5

to 4.5 minutes (variable).

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

On the status display or operation display,

while pressing and holding MENU key, press

3 NR key to open “3. Editing a distress msg”.

The distress type is displayed as

Undesignated as a default value. If the

position information is input automatically by

a GPS type device, or has already input

manually, that information is also displayed.

2

2.

.

Press ENT and select the nature of distress.

The nature of distress is selectable from below.

Nature of distress Contents

Fire Fire, explosion

Flooding Flooding

Collision Collision

Grounding Grounding

Listing Listing, in danger of

capsizing

Sinking Sinking

Disabled Disabled and adrift

Undesignated Undesignated distress

Abandoning Abandoning ship

Piracy attack Piracy/armed robbery

attack

Man overboard Man overboard

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

Attention

Operation

4-50

3

3.

.

Press ENT.

The cursor moves to Position. If a valid position

and time of that position are already displayed,

no entry is necessary. Skip to step 6.

4

4.

.

Press ENT and select the quadrant of the

position with the jog dial.

The quadrant changes from NE Æ NW Æ SE

Æ SW Æ CL. Select CL to delete the input

information.

5

5.

.

After pressing ENT, input the latitude,

longitude, and time using the numeric

keypad.

6

6.

.

Press ENT and select the Mode to

change the subsequent communication

mode after the DSC call.

Either of Radiotelephone or FEC is selectable

for the subsequent communicate mode.

7

7.

.

Move the cursor to Attempt type and

press ENT to change the transmission

method for the distress alert.

Multi-frequency method is set as the default.

To change to the single frequency method,

select Single-FRQ with the job dial and press

ENT.

8

8.

.

Move the cursor to Tx bands and press

ENT to change the transmission

frequency for the distress alert.

¾ At first, all the frequencies are selected

as transmission frequencies.

¾ To change the frequencies, move the

cursor by pressing ENT to the frequencies

(band) to be unselected, turn the jog dial

so they are blank and press ENT.

¾ For the Multi-frequency method, 2 and 8

are fixed and are skipped. Also in this

case, it is necessary to select more than

one other band.

¾ After completing the Tx bands settings,

the cursor returns to Nature.

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]

Tx bands :[2/ /6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

Operation

4-51

If pressing DISTRESS key during the Tx bands settings (before fixing by pressing

ENT), the distress alerts are sent on the band(s) registered previously.

9

9.

.

Open the DISTRESS key cover.

1

10

0

0.

.

Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4

seconds until the countdown is

completed.

- The rest of the procedure is the same as described in the "Quick distress

alerts".

- Select Preview and press ENT before calling to display the details of the

message as shown below.

- Select Tips and press ENT to display precautions about operations in this

screen in a popup screen as shown below.

This popup screen shows the following messages and the handling menus;

・ When sending the edited message, use DISTRESS key on the menu screen.

・ To save the edited message (except Pos/UTC), select Save and press ENT.

・ To load the saved message (except Pos/UTC), select Set and press ENT.

・ The default values of “3. Editing a distress msg” are not changed.

Note

3)Editing a distress msg

Format :Distress

Self-ID :431001234

Nature :Fire

Position : 89ﾟ59.0123'N

:179ﾟ59.6789'E

UTC of pos :23:59

Comm type :Radiotelephone

EOS :EOS

[Return] [Tips] [Cancel]

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

DSC Rx: 2177.0/Tx: 2177.0kHz

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[NE]

[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

[179ﾟ59.6789'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]

Tx bands :[2/4/6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

Tx bands

Distress call starts

in sec

4

Note

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx: 4015.0/Tx: 4015.0kHz

3)Editing a distress msg

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NW]

[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]

[179ﾟ59.6789'W]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]

Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]

Tx bands :[2/ /6/8/12/16]

[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]

[Tips]

- Press DISTRESS key to

send the edited msg.

- To save DIST msg:Save

- To use saved msg:Set

NB)DEFAULT NOT CHANGED.

[Save] [Set] [Close]

[Close]

Operation

4-52

4

4.

.5

5.

.5

5.

.3

3

Receiving distress alerts

When a distress alert is received from another ship, displays the event immediately with the

specific two-tone alarm sound.

WARNING

If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or

officer in charge. Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers

on the ship in distress.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

When a distress alert is received, the

distress message is displayed.

¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving

alarm gradually grows louder. However, the

aural alarm keeps silence if the distress

position is not within 500nm, and is not in the

polar areas (greater than 70°N/S).

¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the

received message automatically.

2

2.

.

Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the

alarm. Then the screen at right is displayed.

¾ Keep watch for at least 5 minutes. Notify

the coast station as appropriate.

¾ If received the same distress alert on another

frequency again, the right lower screen is

displayed. Then pressing ENT on Accept or

leaving 10 seconds changes the frequency to

8291.0 kHz for the radiotelephone mode or

8376.5 kHz for the telex mode.

¾ Press FUNC key or ENT* to move the focused

screen to the operation control screen and select

the following options to handle the procedure.

* If the A mark is not displayed, press ENT to

activate this procedure.

ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement to the distress alert.

RLY ....... Sends the distress relay.

INF ........ Indicates the received distress message.

FRQ....... Changes the watchkeeping frequency.

HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold.

END....... Terminates the procedure.

- The distress acknowledgement is normally sent from a coast station. However

after consulting with the RCC or a coast station and being directed, it is

possible to acknowledge the ship in distress from your own ship.

- If the distress alert is not received at 2187.5 kHz, the acknowledgement is

inhibited and cannot be sent.

- Incase of the radiotelephone specified, after sending the acknowledgement the

frequency is set to 2182.0 kHz. Then start the radiotelephone communication

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT

Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)

Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0KHz

Press CANCEL to silence alarm.

A DST ALT

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT

Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)

Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz

[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]

A DST ALT

Note

Operation

4-53

with the ship in distress according to the following procedure.

z Say "MAYDAY".

z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times

z Say "This is..."

z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times

z Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY".

- Incase of the FEC specified, after sending the acknowledgement the frequency

is set to 2174.5 kHz. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal.

- The distress relay calls may be received without receiving the distress alert. In

this case, keep watch the distress frequency and handle the message using

the displayed options as appropriate.

4.5.6 Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE)

If another ship is in distress but is itself unable to make a distress alert, and the master of the

ship considers that further help is necessary, the distress relay call on behalf of the ship can be

transmitted using the "DSC drobose call" menu. In this case, compose a distress relay call format

by inputting the MMSI (if known), the ship's position and the time of position (if known), and the

nature of distress to send to a specific area or a coast station.

CAUTION

When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may

cause a false distress alert.

(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.)

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

On the status display or operation display,

while pressing and holding MENU key, press

2SCAN key to open “2. DSC drobose call”.

2

2.

.

Select Address and press ENT, input the

MMSI of the calling coast station.

2)DSC drobose call

Format :[Individual]

Address :[ ]

Distress ID:[ ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ ﾟ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

2)DSC drobose call

Format :[Individual]

Address :[0 ]

Distress ID:[ ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ ﾟ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

Operation

4-54

3

3.

.

Input the Distress ID (MMSI) of the ship

in distress, Nature, Position and/or UTC,

if known.

The nature of distress is selectable from below.

Nature of distress Contents

Fire Fire, explosion

Flooding Flooding

Collision Collision

Grounding Grounding

Listing Listing, in danger of

capsizing

Sinking Sinking

Disabled Disabled and adrift

Undesignated Undesignated distress

Abandoning Abandoning ship

Piracy attack Piracy/armed robbery

attack

Man overboard Man overboard

4

4.

.

If required, change the communication

mode and/or the calling frequency to

send the drobose call.

Mode: Radiotelephone or FEC

Calling FRQ: Distress and safety frequency

(2/4/6/8/12/16 MHz)

5

5.

.

Select Call and press ENT to make a

drobose call.

After sending the drobose call, TEL mode is

set while waiting for the acknowledgement as

shown at right. In this case, the watchkeeping

receiver stops scanning frequencies to watch

only the calling frequency as shown at right.

6

6.

.

When receiving the acknowledgement

from the coast station, the screen shows

as shown at right.

¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the

receiving alarm gradually grows louder.

¾ Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence

the alarm, then start the distress traffic.

Such messages can be sent using Area format. In this case, select Area (centre

or corner) for the broadcast communication.

2)DSC drobose call

Format :[Individual]

Address :[001234567]

Distress ID:[0 ]

Nature :[Undesignated ]

Position :[ ]

:[ ﾟ . ' ]

UTC of pos :[ : ]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

2)DSC drobose call

Distress ID:[123456789]

Nature :[Fire ]

Position :[NE]

:[ 89ﾟ59.0000'N]

:[179ﾟ59.0000'E]

UTC of pos :[23:59]

Mode :[Radiotelephone]

Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]

[Call] [Preview] [Cancel]

Note

TEL

2182.0

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TxTO:001234567|IND|DST RLY

Waiting for ACK(00.5min)

Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz

TEL :Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz

[RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]

A DST RLY

Operation

4-55

4.6 DSC call log

DSC messages are classified as received distress messages, received other messages and

transmitted messages. The 20 most recent messages for every type are saved in the log.

CAUTION

Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to

avoid accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such

messages cannot be read, it is not a malfunction.

The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power

by such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention

(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn

off the equipment when at sea.

4.6.1 Received distress messages

The distress alerts, the distress acknowledgements, the distress relay calls, and the distress

relay acknowledgements are stored in this log. For the distress alerts, the messages with the

same content are received at a maximum of 6 messages for the multi-frequency method or a

maximum of 5 messages for the single frequency method, but only one is stored unless otherwise

closed the received message during that multiple receptions.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select “4.1 Received

distress”.

¾ On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship

is displayed highlighted by the cursor.

¾ If the message includes a reception error

(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT

field.

2

2.

.

Select a displayed message and press

ENT.

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx: 4125.0/Tx: 4125.0kHz

4.1)Received distress

No Date/Time CAT Format

01 2008-07-31 11:20 DST ALL

02 2008-07-31 10:33 DST INDIV

03 2008-07-31 10:25 DST AREA

04 2008-07-31 10:03 --- DSTRS

05 2008-07-19 22:53 ERR DSTRS

01 2008-08-01 23:31 DST INDIV

From: 431000123

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

TEL Rx: 2065.0/Tx: 2065.0kHz

Received distress message

Type :Distress

From :003456789

Nature :Man overboard

Position :12ﾟ34.0000'N

123ﾟ45.0000'E

UTC of pos:11:20

Mode :Radiotelephone

EOS :EOS

[Close]

Operation

4-56

4.6.2 Received other messages

Received messages other than the distress (routine, safety, and urgency) are stored in this log.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select “4.2 Received

others”.

¾ On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship

is displayed highlighted by the cursor.

¾ If the message includes a reception error

(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT

field.

2

2.

.

Select a displayed message and press

ENT.

The selected message is displayed.

4.6.3 Transmitted messages

Every transmitted message is stored in this log.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select “4.3 Transmitted

calls”.

On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship is

displayed highlighted by the cursor.

2

2.

.

Select a displayed message and press ENT.

The selected message is displayed.

Operation

4-57

4.7 Display of telex communication logs

The telex communication is saved automatically as the log, and the reference is available later.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Î Call logging history with

Enter key.

The list of the log as shown at

right is displayed.

3

3.

.

Move the cursor to the objective file referring to the timestamp and press Enter key to

view it.

¾ The file content on the viewer scrolls by the ↑↓ key.

¾ To close the file viewer, press the ESC key.

The maximum size of a log file is 8192 bytes. When exceeding it, the excess data

are stored in another file.

Note

Operation

4-58

4.8 USB memory operation

This section describes how to use the USB memory.

・ The following conditions are required for the USB memory.

Note) Not all USB memories satisfying the every condition are guaranteed.

- The specification is complied with USB 1.1 or USB 2.0 standards.

- No USB hub is built-in and is used to connect the USB memory.

- No security function such as encryption or password to access is included.

- No write-protect function is included, or that function is set to “Writable”.

- Already formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 by Windows® OS.

・ Only the USB memory is connectable to the USB memory connector.

・ When the USB memory size is large, the file access time will be longer than small one.

・ The files or folders named with multibyte character prepared by other than the data terminal

cannot be accessed.

・ If the USB memory is removed, always close the connector with the rubber cap to ensure the

water-proof and dust-proof performance.

・ Initializing the USB memory will erase all data on the USB memory.

・ To avoid abnormal conditions, do not use the USB memory that has the broken file system.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

After checking the USB mark indicating on the top of the display of the data terminal,

select File from the main menu and the objective dropdown menu.

¾ To start either one of Edit existing file, Rename file, Delete file, or Copy file, input “A:” as

the USB drive.

¾ To initialize the USB memory, select Initialize USB and operate in accordance with the

message on the dialog box.

¾ To unmount the USB memory, select Remove USB and operate in accordance with the

message on the dialog box. After completing the unmount and the USB mark of the top of

the display is erased, the USB memory can be safely removed from the data terminal.

Attention

[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz USB

File Tune Connect Service System Help

STATUS INFO

[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]

Tx.POWER :[HIGH]

Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...

Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER

Last status message

Operation

4-59

4.9 Popup screens

The contents of the popup screens of the data terminal are as follows (in alphabetical order).

Message Buttons Description

Attention

Are you sure to erase? Yes/ No

Is it OK to delete a file?

Yes: Deletes the file.

No: Cancels this operation.

Attention

Are you sure to initialize all of these

accessible setup data?

Yes/ No

Is it OK to initialize the all items

where the cursor can be located.

Yes: Initializes them.

No: Cancels this operation.

Attention

Do you really want to change column width? Yes/ No

Is it OK to change the column width

of a line?

Yes: Changes the column width.

No: Cancels this operation.

Attention

Formatting will erase all data on the USB

memory. To format the USB memory, choose

Yes.

Yes/ No

All the data of USB memory is

deleted by the format operation.

Yes: Formats the USB memory.

No: Cancel the format.

Attention

Keyboard input unavailable now.

The connected controller is in operation.

-----

The controller is in operation such as

menu and the data terminal cannot

be operated now.

Attention

The antenna tuning is started by the

controller. Wait a moment, please.

-----

Now tuning the antenna with the

controller, and unavailable for a

while.

Attention

The current database will be lost.

Are you sure to continue?

Yes/ No

Is it OK to overwrite the current

database file to save the new one?

Yes: Overwrites the current file.

No: Cancels this operation.

Attention

The DTE cancels the print request for the

DTE printing buffer overflow.

OK

The print request from the controller

or by the data terminal operation has

been refused for the printing buffer

overflow.

Attention

The file size exceeds the maximum value,

so the DTE deletes excess data. Are you

sure?

Yes/ No

When saving a file, detected the file

size is exceeding the 8kB. The data

terminal can delete the excess data

and continue to save the file.

Yes: Continues the process.

No: Cancels this operation.

Attention

The maximum field size is reached. OK The editing message file size is now

beyond 8kB. Please downsize it.

Attention

The same file name already exists.

Do you overwrite it?

Yes/ No

The same file name exists. Is it 0K to

overwrite it?

Yes: Overwrites the current file.

No: Cancels this operation.

Block has not marked.

This function is impossible now. OK No block is selected and refused the

request. Select a block in advance.

Confirmation

Is the frequency free now? Yes/ No

Check the frequency is busy or not.

Yes: Continues the process.

No: Returns to the menu

Continue Search? Yes/ No

Continue searching the string

specified?

Yes: Continues searching.

No: Cancels this operation.

Operation

4-60

Message Buttons Description

Error

File access failed. OK The specified file cannot be used for

any malfunction.

Error

Invalid file. OK The file is malformed and invalid.

Error

Keyboard I/F ROM checksum error. OK Detected the keyboard I/F ROM

checksum error.

Error

No folder exists. OK A specified folder is not found.

Error

No response. OK The controller may be busy and

returns no reply to the data terminal.

Error

Overcurrent has been detected at the USB

port.

OK The attached USB device may be

failure.

Error

Register the 9-digit Self-ID in advance. OK

Own station ID (9digit selcal number)

is needed to call the station by the 9

digit selcal number.

Error

Register this station's ID in advance. OK Own station ID is needed to call the

station in the telex mode.

Error

The antenna is not tuned correctly.

Tune to the frequency now?

Yes/ No

The antenna is not tuned. Starts the

antenna tuning immediately?

Yes: Tunes immediately.

No: Tuning is not needed.

Error

The attached USB device is not supported.

The DTE supports the USB memory only.

OK The data terminal detects the USB

device except the USB memory.

Error

The DTE failed to access to the file system. OK The file system and the files are

inaccessible now.

Error

The DTE failed to print. OK Printing is unavailable now.

Error

The DTE failed to stop the USB drive. OK The USB drive cannot be unmounted.

Error

The DTE was unable to complete the

format. Please remove the USB memory.

OK

The data terminal failed to format the

USB memory, so remove the USB

memory.

Error

The file is too large. OK

The specified file cannot be opened

because of the file size beyond the

8kB.

Operation

4-61

Message Buttons Description

Error

The file name extension is allowed only

“DB”.

OK Input “DB” as the correct extension.

Error

The file name extension is allowed only

“TLX”.

OK Input “TLX” as the correct extension.

Error

The file name is wrong. OK The specified file is not found, or

the file name to be copied is wrong.

Error

The file saving failed.

There is not enough room on the DTE drive.

OK

No file can be saved because the

data terminal has no sufficient

vacant memory.

Error

The keyboard is disconnected. -----

The keyboard is disconnected and no

control for the data terminal is

available now.

Error

The keyboard is not ready. -----

Malfunction is detected at the

keyboard I/F and the keyboard is no

longer available now.

Error

The memory is already full.

So you cannot make a new file.

OK

The number of files exceeded

maximum value (100), so a new file

cannot be made.

Error

The printer is not ready.

Check the paper and online status.

OK

The printer cannot be used. Confirm

that paper is put on or that it is

online.

Error

The same file name already exists. OK This file name already exists, and is

no longer available now.

Error

The station ID is not present. OK

SELCAL number (ID) is not

registered in the specified radio

station.

Error

There is a possibility of the USB IC failure.

All USB functions are disabled.

OK Detected the USB IC failure. And now

out of work here.

Error

There is not enough room on the DTE main

drive. Delete some files, or change the

folder.

OK

The data terminal has no sufficient

vacant memory. Delete files or

change the folder adequately.

Error

There is not enough room on the USB drive.

Delete some files, or change the folder.

OK

The USB memory has no sufficient

vacant area. Delete files or change

the folder adequately.

Error

Two or more channels are needed. OK

Register two or more channels to

start scanning of the specified

station..

Error

Tx/Rx frequency is not present. OK The frequency is not registered in the

specified radio station.

Operation

4-62

Message Buttons Description

Formatting the USB memory.

Please wait. ----- USB memory is being formatted.

Wait for a while.

Now printing.

Please wait. ----- It is printing.

Wait for a while.

Now reading data.

Please wait. ----- Information on the file and the folder

is being read. Wait for a while.

Now processing NBDP settings.

Please wait. ----- The NBDP setting information is now

being read or saved. Wait for a while.

Now saving data.

Please wait. ----- It is saving a file. Wait for a while.

Really quit without saving? Yes/ No

Is it OK to quit without saving?

Yes: Quits immediately

No: Returns to the editor.

Replace the string? Yes/ No

Continue to replace the strings

specified?

Yes: Replacing.

No: Cancels this operation.

String not found. OK The data terminal cannot find the

string searching.

The USB drive is installed and ready to use. OK Recognized the USB memory.

The USB memory can now be safely

removed from the DTE. OK Unmounting the USB drive was

completed.

The USB memory format complete. OK The format of USB memory was

completed.

There are no data to be restored. OK There are no data to be restored and

Undo is invalid.

To stop the USB drive, choose Yes. After

the USB drive is stopped, the USB drive

can be safely removed.

Yes/ No

Select Yes when you unmount the

USB drive. After unmounting, USB

memory can be removed.

Waiting for the tuner answer… -----

Now waiting for the answer from the

antenna tuner. Just a moment,

please.

Warning

The USB memory was removed without

unmounting that drive.

OK

Removing the USB memory without

unmounting may cause the

malfunction of the USB memory.

Settings & Registrations

5-1

5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS

This chapter describes the procedures for settings and registrations such as manual date

and time settings, registration of channels in each mode, advanced DSC settings, printer

settings, and other settings for the equipment.

5.1 Date and time settings

Normally, the date and time are updated automatically if importing GPS information. But, if

necessary, input these parameters manually as follows.

CAUTION

The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is

different from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time

when the position information is valid.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.1 Date &

time.

2

2.

.

To input the date, press ENT.

Input the year, month, and date with the

numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.

3

3.

.

After completing the above steps, the

cursor moves to 2. Present time.

7.1)Date & time

1.Date :2011-12-30

2.Present time :23:59

3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back

7.1)Date & time

1.Date :2012-12-30

2.Present time :23:59

3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back

7.1)Date & time

1.Date :2012-12-31

2.Present time :23:59

3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-2

4

4.

.

To input the present time, press ENT.

¾ Input the hours and minutes with the

numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.

¾ To close this menu after completing the

date and time settings, place the cursor

on any one of the selectable items and

press the CANCEL key.

In addition to the above, the following items can be set in this menu.

- UTC/LT: Select a type of time, Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or Local

Time (LT), shown on the screen.

- LT diff: Set the local time difference to display the local time.

Note

7.1)Date & time

1.Date :2012-12-31

2.Present time :23:59

3.Display form

- UTC/LT :UTC

- LT diff : :

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-3

5.2 Own ship position and time settings

Normally, the ship's position and the time are updated automatically if importing GPS information.

But, if necessary, input these parameters manually as follows.

CAUTION

The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position

information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the

7.1 Date & time menu.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.2

POS/TIME.

2

2.

.

To input your own ship's position, press

ENT.

Select the position quadrant with the jog dial,

and press ENT. Then input the latitude and

longitude with the numeric keypad or jog dial,

and press ENT.

3

3.

.

When completing the input of the ship’s

position, the cursor moves to the time

column of the

2. UTC of position.

¾ Input the hours and minutes with the

numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.

¾ Just after inputting the position, the

present time is input to this column

automatically.

¾ To close this menu after completing the

setting, press the CANCEL key.

- After the position and the time information are input manually, that information

is not overwritten with an external device, such as a GPS, automatically.

- If using the GPS information after manually inputting data, set the quadrant

field mentioned above to “GPS”.

- If the position and the time information are not received, from a GPS or other

device within 10 minutes after powering on, or after 10 minutes has elapsed

since the external input was interrupted, the alarm screen may appear. Further,

regardless of either manual or automatic input, if the position and the time are

not updated within 4 hours since the last entry, the alarm screen also appears.

7.2)POS/TIME

1.Own position:NE

89ﾟ59.1234'N

179ﾟ59.1234'E

2.UTC of position:

23:59

0.Back

7.2)POS/TIME

1.Own position:NE

89ﾟ59.1234'N

179ﾟ59.1234'E

2.UTC of position:

23:59

0.Back

7.2)POS/TIME

1.Own position:NE

89ﾟ59.1234'N

179ﾟ59.1234'E

2.UTC of position:

23:59

0.Back

Note

Settings & Registrations

5-4

5.3 Controller settings

The following describes the procedure regarding individual settings for the controller such as LCD

adjustment.

5.3.1 LCD adjustment

The LCD conditions for viewability are adjustable as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3.1 LCD

adjustment.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to the desired item and

press ENT. Then alter the settings as

appropriate with the numeric keypad or

jog dial, and press ENT again.

¾ Set each item within the ranges given

below:

 Contrast: 1 - 11

 Dimmer: 1 - 10

 Screen saver: ON/OFF

Timer: 1 - 999 seconds

¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on

any one of the selectable items and press

the CANCEL key.

5.3.2 Sound settings

Sound settings such as the click beep are adjustable as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3.2 Sound.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to the desired item and

press ENT. Then set the conditions as

appropriate with the numeric keypad or

jog dial, and press ENT again.

¾ Notification level for a tone can be set

within 1 - 7.

¾ When Sidetone is set to ON, an 800 Hz

tone sounds during keying in.

¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on

any one of the selectable items and press

the CANCEL key.

7.3.1)LCD adjustment

1.Contrast : 06

2.Dimmer

Maximum : 10

Typical : 08

Minimum : 06

3.Screen saver : OFF

Timer(sec): 060

0.Back

7.3.1)LCD adjustment

1.Contrast : 06

2.Dimmer

Maximum : 10

Typical : 08

Minimum : 06

3.Screen saver : OFF

Timer(sec): 060

0.Back

7.3.2)Sound

1.Operation

- Speaker : ON

- Click : ON

2.Notification level: 7

3.Sidetone : ON

0.Back

7.3.2)Sound

1.Operation

- Speaker : ON

- Click : ON

2.Notification level: 7

3.Sidetone : ON

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-5

5.3.3 User key assignments

User key assignment enables the desired menu to be displayed immediately without moving

through the hierarchical menus, and is assignable as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3.3 User

key assign.

The screen at right is displayed. If the

desired menu has already been registered,

the cursor is placed on that menu.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to the desired menu to

be registered with the jog dial.

The assignable menus are as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

DSC non-distress call

DSC drobose call

Editing a distress msg

DSC logs

Radio operation

User channel list

ITU channel list

Receiver

Scan

Transmitter

Maintenance

Self diagnosis

DSC loop

Alarm information

Software version

Setup

Date & time

(Menu1)

(Menu2)

(Menu3)

(Menu4)

(Menu5)

(Menu5.1)

(Menu5.2)

(Menu5.4)

(Menu5.4.7)

(Menu5.5)

(Menu6)

(Menu6.1)

(Menu6.1.1)

(Menu6.2)

(Menu6.3)

(Menu7)

(Menu7.1)

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

POS/TIME

My controller

LCD adjustment

Sound

User channels

DSC/WKR condition

Automatic ACK

WKR scanning FRQ

Option

CH dial lock ON/OFF

2182kHz

AM mode

DSC alarm setting

Group ID

Inactivity timeout

DSC call list

(Menu7.2)

(Menu7.3)

(Menu7.3.1)

(Menu7.3.2)

(Menu7.4)

(Menu7.5)

(Menu7.5.1)

(Menu7.5.2)

(Menu7.6)

---

(Menu7.3.3)

(Menu7.5.6)

(Menu7.5.7)

(Menu7.5.8)

3

3.

.

Press ENT to complete registration.

After registration, the screen returns to the

previous hierarchical menu as shown at

right.

When the USER key is pressed in the factory default setting, 7.3 My controller

menu is immediately displayed.

Note

7.3.3)User key assign

1.DSC non-distress call

2.DSC drobose call

3.Editing a distress msg

4.DSC logs

5.Radio operation

6.User channel list

7.ITU channel list

8.Receiver

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-6

5.3.4 Selecting Tx meters

The meter displayed in the status display indicates the strength of the received signal (S meter).

However, it can also indicate one of Tx power, antenna current, PA voltage, PA current or key

information during transmission.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My

controller.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to 4. Tx meter with the

numeric keypad or jog dial.

3

3.

.

Press ENT, and select the meter type

with the jog dial.

The selectable meters are as follows:

 PWR .... Tx power

 Ia ........ Antenna current

 Vc ....... PA voltage

 Ic ........ PA current

 Key…….Key information*

* When keying during the ARQ

communication, the Key is indicated

regardless of this setting.

4

4.

.

Press ENT to confirm the selection.

The setting is complete.

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :Ia

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :Ia

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-7

5.3.5 Transferring user channel data to another controller

When 2 controllers are connected, stored information (user channel table) can be transferred

from the controller having access rights to another controller (monitor condition).

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My

controller.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to 5. Data transfer with

the numeric keypad or jog dial and press

ENT.

The popup screen as shown at right is

displayed.

3

3.

.

Press ENT to confirm the selection.

¾ The popup screen as shown at right is

displayed to indicate the controller's

status for forwarding.

¾ The screen at right (below) is displayed

on the monitor.

If OK is selected or the screen is left as

it is for 10 seconds, transferring of

stored information is started.

4

4.

.

Forwarding of stored information is

started.

¾ During forwarding, the popup screen as

shown at right is displayed.

¾ The screen at right (below) is displayed

on the monitor.

¾ The previous screen is returned to when

forwarding is completed.

To cancel forwarding midway,

press the CANCEL key or ENT.

Note

[Display on monitor]

OK to update this

user channel table?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

[Display on monitor]

Updating the table...

[Cancel]

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter : Ia

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

OK to transfer the

user channels to

another controller?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter : Ia

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

Wait a moment, please.

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter : Ia

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

Data sending...

[Cancel]

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-8

5.3.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown)

To close menus of the controller automatically which is left as opening menus, the inactivity timer

can be set according to the following procedure.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My

controller.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to 6. Menu shutdown

with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and

press ENT.

3

3.

.

Input the timer value and press ENT.

¾ The range is from 00 to 60 minutes.

¾ To set this timer to OFF, input 00.

In this case, the screen shows OFF as

shown at right.

5.3.7 Setting the reference value for the channel auto search

When making a DSC routine call, the controller searches the working channel (frequency)

automatically by checking the every channel busy referring the signal level with the value set as

follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My

controller.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to 7. CH search ref with

the numeric keypad or jog dial, and

press ENT.

3

3.

.

Input the reference value and press ENT.

The range is from 00 to 50.

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :OFF

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :10min

7.CH search ref :40

0.Back

7.3)My controller

1.LCD adjustment

2.Sound

3.User key assign

4.Tx meter :PWR

5.Data transfer

6.Menu shutdown :OFF

7.CH search ref :45

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-9

5.4 Registering user channels

Often used frequencies at the controller for the radiotelephone, CW, and DSC mode can be

registered as user channels and used in scanning radio settings or groups. A total of 20 groups

with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered. Furthermore, the user

channels of the telex frequency can be registered to the station list of the data terminal.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.4 User

channels (index).

2

2.

.

Select the desired row or group to be edited

with the numeric keypad or jog dial.

The screen at right is displayed. (This

example is for new registration to group 03.)

Also, if an unregistered group is opened,

TEL is displayed at Type as the default.

3

3.

.

Press ENT to enter the group name.

¾ Up to 18 characters can be registered.

¾ The following characters are available:

 Alphabet (capital and small letters)

 Numbers 0 - 9

 The following signs, space and

determination symbol (

◄

)

[ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < >

¾ Group names can be omitted.

4

4.

.

Select a character and press ENT one by

one.

¾ When inputting numbers with the

numeric keypad ENT is not needed.

¾ To return to the previous letter, press the

CANCEL key.

¾ To complete name entry of 18 characters long,

press ENT after selecting the last character by

the jog dial. Or, if the name is less than 18

characters long, following the name, select the

determination symbol (

◄

), as shown at right

and press ENT.

The character sequence shown by turning the jog dial is as follows:

◄

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n

o p q r s t u v w x y z [ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < > 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(space)

Note

7.4)User channels (index)

No CH group name Type

01 JRC Tokyo TEL

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

Pacific ABC CW

7.4)User channels (table)

Name:

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

7.4)User channels (table)

Name:

◄

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

7.4)User channels (table)

Name: Japan Radio

◄

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

Settings & Registrations

5-10

5

5.

.

After completing the above steps, the

cursor returns to Type.

¾ If necessary, change the group attribute

(communication mode or custom).

¾ The following attributes can be

selected:

 TEL ··········· Radiotelephone mode

 DSC ··········· Digital selective calling mode

 CW ············ Continuous wave mode

 Custom Communication mode mix

6

6.

.

When setting of group attributes is

completed, the cursor returns to the

topmost row of the channel number.

(CHNo).

7

7.

.

Select the channel number to register

with the jog dial, and press ENT.

Register as follows in the popup screen at right.

¾ When the group attribute is Custom, specify

the communication mode at Mode.

Otherwise, the communication mode is

fixed to the mode specified at Type.

¾ To reference a frequency from the ITU

channel, move the cursor to ITU channel,

press ENT, and specify that channel number.

¾ Move the cursor to Rx freq(kHz), press

ENT, and enter the Rx frequency.

¾ Move the cursor to Tx freq(kHz), press

ENT, and enter the Tx frequency.

8

8.

.

After completing the above steps, move

the cursor to OK, and press ENT to

complete registration.

¾ Follow the same procedure above to

create a group of channels.

¾ Already registered channels can be

changed by the above procedure.

¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on

any one of the registration numbers, and

press the CANCEL key.

- To delete an already registered channel, move the cursor to Erase in the

above popup screen, and press ENT.

- To erase an already registered group, move the cursor to "000 ALL CLEAR

function" in the bottommost row of the channel list, and press ENT. Next,

move the cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT.

- To erase all already registered groups, move the cursor to "00 ALL CLEAR

function" in the User channels (index) screen, and press ENT. Next, move the

cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT.

- When the 7.6.1 Connection is set to DTE, the group 20 becomes the reserved

group for telex channels of the data terminal and inaccessible at the controller.

Note

7.4)User channels (table)

Name: Japan Radio

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

7.4)User channels (table)

Name: Japan Radio

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

7.4)User channels (table)

Name: Japan Radio

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

CHNo. 041/Type TEL

Mode :TEL

ITU Channel :

Rx freq(kHz) :

Tx freq(kHz) :

[OK] [Cancel] [Erase]

7.4)User channels (table)

Name: Japan Radio

Type: TEL

CHNo Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Mode

041

042

043

044

045

046

4071.0 4071.0 TEL

Settings & Registrations

5-11

5.5 Advanced settings for DSC/WKR

The following describes the procedure for the advanced DSC settings such as automatic

acknowledgement, as well as setting the watch frequency of the watch keeping receiver.

■ Menu screen ■

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.5 DSC/WKR

condition.

The following describes the procedures from

this screen. Note that the screen at right

shows factory default settings.

5.5.1 Automatic acknowledgement

While the automatic acknowledgement is set to ON, and no menu is displayed and there is no

active procedure, if either one of the individual calls below is received, the acknowledgement is

sent automatically.

 Safety test call

 Safety position request call

 Routine polling call

 Individual call requesting communication without valid frequency (*)

(*) In this case, the “unable to comply” acknowledgement is sent.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Move the cursor to 1. Automatic ACK,

and press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Set the call setting targeted for

automatic acknowledgement to ON.

5.5.2 Setting DSC watch frequency

Set the frequency to watch on the WKR (DSC watch keeping receiver).

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Move the cursor to 2. WKR scanning

FRQ, and press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Press ENT, and set another frequency in

addition to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz to ON.

In accordance with the SOLAS Convention, 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz cannot be

turned OFF.

7.5)DSC/WKR condition

1.Automatic ACK

2.WKR scanning FRQ

3.DSC alarm setting

4.Medical use :OFF

5.Neutral use :OFF

6.Group ID

7.Inactivity timeout

8.DSC call list

Note

7.5.2)WKR scanning FRQ

1.Registration

- CH1 2187.5kHz :(Const)

- CH2 4207.5kHz :OFF

- CH3 6312.0kHz :ON

- CH4 8414.5kHz :(Const)

- CH5 12577.0kHz :ON

- CH6 16804.5kHz :OFF

0.Back

7.5.1)Automatic ACK

1.Test call :ON

2.Position RQ call :OFF

3.Polling call :ON

4.Individual call :ON

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-12

5.5.3 Setting receiving alarms

The DSC receiving alarm can be set as follows.

■ Procedure ■

Move the cursor to 3. DSC alarm setting, and

press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

Change the settings as appropriate.

¾ To disable the receiving alarms for routine

and safety calls, set 1. Safety/Routine RX

ALM to OFF.

¾ The receiving alarms condition of distress alerts or distress relay calls can be changed

using the menu 2. Distress RX ALM as follows.

- Normally when receiving a new distress event, the receiving alarm has to be stopped

manually. However if the ship in distress is located within 70 degree north and 70

degree south latitude, and farther than the Maximum distance value while the Self-

terminating set is ON, the alarm is treated as the self-terminating alarm.

- The Maximum distance can be set within the range of 500 to 999 NM.

Note1) If making this value valid, always set the Self-terminating to ON.

Note2) If receiving DSC messages from the ships located out of range, the messages

are handled normally except the alarm sound.

5.5.4 Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls

Set the condition so that an urgency area call containing the additional subject of either "Medical

transportation" or "Neutral nationality" can be sent. It is useful for the situation when sailing

dangerous waters such as in areas of political instability, and needed to inform receivers of the

additional information if any of the following apply.

-

Own ship is performing medical transportation and protected under the 1949 Geneva Convention.

-

Own ship is of neutral nationality in accordance with ITU resolution 18 (Mob-83).

Additionally note that this setting is returned to the default (OFF) if the power is turned off.

■ Procedure ■

To use these kinds of calls, set 4. Medical use or 5. Neutral use condition to ON.

5.5.5 Registering the ship's group ID

Register the group ID (group ship ID number) for receiving group calls.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Move the cursor to 6. Group ID, and

press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to register the ID

number and press ENT, then input the 9

digits ID (leftmost digit fixed to 0).

¾ Upto 20 groups can be registered.

¾ When finished, press CANCEL key.

7.5.3)DSC alarm setting

1.Safety/Routine RX ALM :ON

2.Distress RX ALM

- Maximum distance(NM):500

- Self-terminating :OFF

0.Back

7.5.6)Group ID

No 9-digit ID number

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

043100001

Settings & Registrations

5-13

5.5.6 Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold)

When making a procedure on hold, the procedure is automatically terminated after the time set as

follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Move the cursor to 7. Inactivity timeout,

and press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

Change the settings as appropriate.

1. ACKed distress alert

The acknowledged distress alert events

sent from the own ship:

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.

2. RCVed other distress

The distress events of other ships

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.

3. Non-distress call

Routine, safety and urgency events

- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.

4. Other communications

Communications without using DSC

- The range is 010 to 600 seconds.

5.5.7 Registering the DSC call list

To call the station using the DSC, registers the station names, MMSI and the calling frequencies

as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Move the cursor to 8. DSC call list, and

press ENT.

The screen as shown at right is displayed.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to the line to be

changed and press ENT to display the

frequency list as shown at right.

3

3.

.

Input data as appropriate using the

numeric keypad or jog dial.

¾ Upto 20 channels for every 20 stations can

be registered.

¾ When finished, press CANCEL key.

7.5.7)Inactivity timeout

1.ACKed distress alert:OFF

2.RCVed other distress:OFF

3.Non-distress call :15min

4.Other communications:030sec

0.Back

7.5.8)DSC call list

No Station name MMSI

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

JRC Mitaka1

431000001

7.5.8)DSC call list(FRQ)

Name:JRC Mitaka1

MMSI:431000001

No Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Category

01

02

03

04

05

06

2177.0

4219.5

4220.0

4220.5

2189.5

4208.0

4208.5

4209.0

RTN

Settings & Registrations

5-14

5.6 Setting connections for options

When setting connections between the controller and optional devices, such as a printer,

configure the conditions as appropriate according to the device type, as follows.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 7.6 Option.

2

2.

.

Move the cursor to the desired item, and

press ENT.

Move the cursor to the right. Then select the

condition as appropriate and press ENT.

- The content and the selectable conditions of each item are as follows.

Item Name Content Selectable conditions

( : Factory default)

Connection Connection status and printer type None/CMD/ Serial PRN/

NKG-800/ DTE

Data out Printing method for DSC messages ---/ Auto/ Manual

Baudrate Transmission speed to printer ---/ 4.8k/ 9.6k/ 38.4k/ 57.6kbps

Flow control Handshake setting with printer ---/ None/ Hard

Print direction Printing sequence of lines ---/ Upright/ Invert

- When connecting a serial printer (e.g. NKG-91), set the items as follows:

1.Connection :Serial PRN

2.Data out :Auto

3.Baudrate :4.8k

4.Flow control :Hard

5.Print direction :Invert (NKG-91)/Upright (DPU-414)

- When connecting the NKG-800 printer, set the items as follows:

1.Connection :NKG-800

2.Data out :Auto

- If no option is connected, select None/CMD at the Connection.

Note) When None/CMD is set, connect nothing to the serial port.

- When connecting the data terminal to the controller for the telex communication,

set Connection item to DTE. Note that restart the system just after this setting.

Moreover, Baudrate, Flow control and Print direction become unchangeable in

this case.

Note

7.6)Option

1.Connection :None/CMD

2.Data out :---

3.Baudrate :---

4.Flow control :---

5.Print direction :---

0.Back

7.6)Option

1.Connection :None/CMD

2.Data out :---

3.Baudrate :---

4.Flow control :---

5.Print direction :---

0.Back

Settings & Registrations

5-15

5.7 Setting of data terminal

The following describes the procedure regarding LCD adjustment, such as the color settings and

brightness, and registration of the station list.

5.7.1 LCD adjustment

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System Î Config with Enter key.

The setting conditions

concerning to the screen are

displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the item to be changed by the cursor and press Enter key, then input the

appropriate condition.

Set the item using the numeric

keypad or dropdown menu,

where the cursor moves to the

right as shown at right. As for

other items, the specific menu

is displayed.

Config

LCD/LED dimmer (0-15) : 13

LCD/LED dimmer button setting

Screensaver setting

- Function ON/OFF : ON

- Starting time (1-15) : 3 minutes

Display color pattern : Ocean Day

User defined color setting

- Background color of main display: Green

- Text color of main display : White

- Background color of H&F display : Lime

- Text color of H&F display : Navy

- Shortcut character color : Orange

Set Cancel

LCD/LED dimmer

Settings & Registrations

5-16

4

4.

.

When completing the setting, move the cursor to the Set and press Enter key.

The content of each setting item is as follows.

Item Content of setting Remarks

LCD/LED dimmer (0-15) Adjusts the brightness of the LCD

and the panel lamp by 16 steps.

Without using this menu,

the dimmer is adjustable

with Ctrl+Ç or Ctrl+È

operation.

LCD/LED dimmer button setting

Sets the brightness of the LCD and

the panel lamp when using the DIM

key on the panel.

Screensaver setting

- Function ON/OFF Sets the screen saver ON/OFF.

- Starting time (1-15) Sets the time until the screensaver

starts.

The screensaver is invalid

at the following cases;

・ communicating in the

telex mode,

・ running self-diagnosis.

Display color pattern

Sets the color of the screen from the

following 9 patterns of the dropdown

list.

- Ocean Day/ Dusk/ Night

- Earth Day/ Dusk/ Night

- Basic Black/ White

- User defined

User defined color setting

-

Background color of main display

Sets the background color of the

main screen from the following.

Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange

・ This menu is valid only

when Display color

pattern = User defined.

・ Setting the same color

with the main screen

or the short cut

character is inhibited.

- Text color of main display

Sets the text color of the main

screen from the following.

Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange

・ This menu is valid only

when Display color

pattern = User defined.

・ Setting the same color

with the background of

the main screen is

inhibited.

-

Background color of H&F display

Sets the background color of the

header/footer screen from the

following.

Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange

・ This menu is valid only

when Display color

pattern = User defined.

・ Setting the same color

with the text of the

header/footer screen is

inhibited.

- Text color of H&F display

Sets the text color of the header/

footer screen from the following.

Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange

・ This menu is valid only

when Display color

pattern = User defined.

・ Setting the same color

with the background of

the header/footer

screen is inhibited.

- Shortcut character color

Sets the shortcut character color

from the following.

Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/

Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/

Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/

Magenta/ Orange

・ This menu is valid only

when Display color

pattern = User defined.

・ Setting the same color

with the background of

the main screen is

inhibited.

Note

Settings & Registrations

5-17

5.7.2 Registering station list

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Î Station list with Enter

key.

The station list is displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the line to be registered newly or to be changed with the cursor and press

Enter key. Then input the station information including the channels on the station list

edit screen.

¾ Input the radio station name

within 16 characters to Station

Name column.

(The @ character is unavailable.)

¾ Input 4 (coast station), 5 (ships

station) or 9 digits SELCAL

number to Station ID column.

¾ The Location and Free CH Sig

are optional.

¾ Move the cursor to the line to

be registered and press Enter

key. Then input the Tx/Rx

frequencies on the popup

screen at right.

4

4.

.

After inputting, press Enter key to close the screen and finish the registration.

Station list

No. Station Name ID Location F.Sig

1 Station 01 004310123 N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12' DOTDOT [Edit]

2 Station 02 004311234 N37ﾟ22' E135ﾟ51' DOTDOT [Erase]

3 Station 03 431012345 [Print]

4 [Cancel]

5

6

7

8

9

10 ↓

1 Station 01 004310123 N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12' DOTDOT

Settings & Registrations

5-18

There is the station database menu (Service Î Station database) as a similar

registration menu to register the station information. The station database

operation is basically the same with the station list. However note that the station

list is designed for the manual input only, but the station database is designed to

register the station information more easily such as copying the original station

database prepared in advance. The functions available on the station database

screen are as follows.

・ Program ·············· Registers the station information located with the

cursor to the desired line of the station list.

・ Read ··················· Reads the station database saved in the flash ROM or

the USB memory.

・ Write ··················· Saves the prepared station database in another drive or

the folder.

・ Get ····················· Loads station information of the station list on a line of

the station database.

Note

Settings & Registrations

5-19

5.8 Setting telex mode

The following describes the procedure to check or set the condition for the telex communication.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP

mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.

The operation of the data

terminal becomes possible in

the telex mode, except when

the controller is used.

2

2.

.

On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System Î NBDP setup with Enter

key.

The setting conditions

concerning to the telex

communication are displayed.

3

3.

.

Select the item to be changed with the cursor, and press Enter key.

The input screen as shown at right is

displayed.

※ An example of Max. FEC error rate

4

4.

.

Press Enter key to move the cursor to the right. Then input the value and press Enter

key again.

The cursor moves to Set.

Setup data input

Max. FEC error rate : [ 30] %

Input range is from 1 to 100.

Set Cancel

Max. FEC error rate

Setup data input

Max. FEC error rate : [ 30] %

Input range is from 1 to 100.

Set Cancel

Set

Settings & Registrations

5-20

5

5.

.

When the cursor is located on Set, press Enter key to set the value and close the

popup screen.

6

6.

.

After completing the every input, move the cursor to Set and press Enter key to save

and finish the registration.

- When selecting the Initialize with the cursor and pressing Enter key, the every

accessible item is reset to the factory default setting.

- The content of each item and the factory default setting values are as follows.

Item Setting contents

Initial

value Remarks

ARQ/FEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID Registers the SELCAL number.

※ 4-digit is for the coast station. -----

When setting this item,

contact our company or

agency.

GFEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID Registers the group ID.

※ 4-digit is for the coast station -----

ARQ/FEC 9-digit Self-ID 9-digit SELCAL number for

reference. ----- Common with the DSC

GFEC 9-digit Self-ID Registers the 9-digit group ID. -----

Answerback Registers the answerback code

used with WRU and Hereis. -----

When setting this item,

contact our company or

agency.

Max. FEC error rate Sets the permissible error rate that

occurs during CFEC receiving. 30 %

Max. automatic call series

Sets times to retry calling a station

if failed to call the station using the

CALL function.

2 Optional

Collective FEC receiving Sets ON/OFF of the CFEC or SFEC

receiving. ON

Time duration for AUTO

Sets the interval time until retrying

if failed to call a coast station using

the AUTOTELEX function.

10 min Optional

Restart

Sets ON/OFF of the rephasing

function if disconnected the

communication in ARQ mode.

ON

Finite start/restart

Sets ON/OFF of the limit of the

ARQ call times, which is 128 times

for phasing and 32 times for

rephasing.

ON

Transmitter pre-key time Sets a period between key on and

starting the signal output. 10 ms

Note

Maintenance & Inspection

6-1

6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION

The performance and lifetime of the equipment depend on appropriate maintenance. This

chapter describes an outline of maintenance and inspection, self diagnosis and

troubleshooting.

6.1 General maintenance & inspection

In order to operate the equipment under optimum conditions, it is vital to perform regular

inspections and also, to keep accurate records. Inspections enable problems to be identified

before they become major malfunctions. The following inspections should be made regularly.

Inspection

sequence Inspection item Procedure

1 Antenna system Check that antennas and the connectors are secure.

2 RF GAIN function

In the radiotelephone mode (TEL), turn the RF GAIN

control on the controller having access rights. Is the

radio static (noise) from the speaker adjustable?

3 Receiver condition

check by speaker output

Check that the voice level and noise level are not

abnormally loud or soft.

4 Handset PTT switch

In the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, press the PTT

switch, and check that the unit transmits immediately

on the Tx meter or by TX and ON displayed on the

screen.

5

Transmission and

reception check by

performing radio

communication

In the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, check that normal

conversation is possible.

6 Condition of the data

terminal

When the communication mode is other than the telex

mode (e.g. TEL mode), check that the communication

mode can be set to the telex mode by pressing the

Enter key on the keyboard of the data terminal.

7 Air filter Check that if the air filters of the power supply and/or

the battery charger are clogged with dust.

Maintenance & Inspection

6-2

6.2 Self diagnosis inspection

The following describes the procedure for performing self diagnosis in the 6.1 Self diagnosis

menu.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press FUNC Î 8TEST .

The 6.1 Self diagnosis menu is displayed.

2

2.

.

Select Transceiver, Controller/DTE, or

DSC/NBDP loop.

¾ When Transceiver is selected, the screen

at right is displayed.

¾ For DSC/NBDP loop, a shortcut menu for

diagnosing the modem is as shown in the

screen at right.

3

3.

.

In the above screen, press ENT, select

the diagnosis mode with the jog dial, and

press ENT. Self diagnosis is performed.

The following test modes are available:

6.1.1) Transceiver ........ ALL (all modes)

TRX&MODEM

PA&ATU

WKR MODEM

TRX

PA

ATU

6.1.2) Controller/DTE ... ALL (all modes)

DGT CKT

AF output

LCD&LED

Speaker

Printer

DTE

- If the jog dial is turned while the cursor is at Target when Transceiver is selected,

the diagnosis items of each unit and previous diagnosis results can be browsed.

- To cancel self diagnosis midway, press the CANCEL key.

- The results of the self diagnosis are stored as a log, and up to 10 logs can be

confirmed from the 6.1.3 Transceiver log or 6.1.4 Controller/DTE log menu.

- The self diagnosis results are printed out on the connected printer as the factory

default setting. However note that the print format is selectable from Valid (the

target name and the results of diagnosis items), Simple (the target name and the

result), and Invalid (Not print) using the menu 6.1.1 Printout.

- The self diagnosis test contents and results are as shown below. However note

that if PA and/or ATU is in below freezing conditions, to avoid the failure of the

moving part, the FAN is not checked and “-“(hyphen) is shown as the result.

Note

6.1.1)Transceiver

Target :ALL

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :

2.RBK port :

3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

6.1)Self diagnosis

1.Transceiver

2.Controller/DTE

3.Transceiver log

4.Controller/DTE log

5.DSC/NBDP loop

6.Printout :Valid

0.Back

6.1.1)Transceiver

Target :TRX&MODEM

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :

2.RBK port :

3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

6.1.1)Transceiver

Target :ATU

- ATU -

1.Serial I/F :OK

2.RBK port :Checking

3.Band1 input :

4.Band1 tune :

5.Band2 input :

6.Band2 tune :

7.Band3 input :

Maintenance & Inspection

6-3

Unit Name Test Item Contents Results

Transceiver

ATU

x Serial I/F :Serial communication

x RBK port :RBK interface

x Band1 input :2140 kHz input value

x Band1 tune :2140 kHz tuning operation

x Band2 input :4149 kHz input value

x Band2 tune :4149 kHz tuning operation

x Band3 input :6230 kHz input value

x Band3 tune :6230 kHz tuning operation

x Band4 input :8297 kHz input value

x Band4 tune :8297 kHz tuning operation

x Band5 input :16546 kHz input value

x Band5 tune :16546 kHz tuning operation

x Band6 input :25118 kHz input value

x Band6 tune :25118 kHz tuning operation

x Fan :Air cooling fan operation

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

PA

x PA mute port :Confirmation of PA diagnosis

viability

x RBK port :RBK overcurrent detection

x Memory1 :EEPROM1 operation

x Memory2 :EEPROM2 operation

x PA(A) voltage :PA (A) PS voltage

x PA(B) voltage :PA (B) PS voltage *

x DA output :2140 kHz output from DA

x PA(A) bias :PA (A) idling current

x PA(A) output :PA (A) output

x PA(B) bias :PA (B) idling current *

x PA(B) output :PA (B) output *

x

PA(A)+(B) output

:Combined PA output *

x

LPF band1 output

:2140kHz output

x

LPF band2 output

:3023kHz output

x

LPF band3 output

:4149kHz output

x

LPF band4 output

:6230kHz output

x

LPF band5 output

:8297kHz output

x

LPF band6 output

:12365kHz output

x

LPF band7 output

:16546kHz output

x

LPF band8 output

:25118kHz output

x Fan1 : Air cooling fan1 operation

x Fan2 : Air cooling fan2 operation *

x Fan3 : Air cooling fan3 operation

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

*

500W model only

TRX

x Memory :EEPROM operation

x Digital CKT :FPGA operation

x BK port :BK signal state

x PLL lock :State of PLL for DDS/DUC

clock

x

Band1-TX output

:1600 kHz output

x

Band2-TX output

:22000 kHz output

x

Band3-TX output

:27500 kHz output

x

Band4-TX output

:RX diagnosis circuit

x

Band1-RX BPF1

:1600 kHz Rx level

x

Band2-RX BPF2

:390 kHz Rx level

x

Band3-RX BPF3

:1590 kHz Rx level

x

Band4-RX BPF4

:3190 kHz Rx level

x

Band5-RX BPF5

:6090 kHz Rx level

x

Band6-RX BPF6

:10490 kHz Rx level

x

Band7-RX BPF7

:17990 kHz Rx level

x

Band8-RX BPF8

:27500 kHz Rx level

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

Maintenance & Inspection

6-4

Transceiver

(Cont’d)

WKR

MODEM

x Memory1 :FROM operation

x Memory2 :EEPROM operation

x Memory3 :SDRAM operation

x PLL lock :State of PLL for DDS clock

x

Band1-RX BPF1

:2187.5 kHz DSC loop

x

Band2-RX BPF2

:4207.5 kHz DSC loop

x

Band3-RX BPF3

:6312.0 kHz DSC loop

x

Band4-RX BPF4

:8414.5 kHz DSC loop

x

Band5-RX BPF5

:12577.0 kHz DSC loop

x

Band6-RX BPF6

:16804.5 kHz DSC loop

x

Band7-RX BPF7

:Wide-band filter operation

x

DSC/NBDP loop1

:AF modem loop

x

DSC/NBDP loop2

:AF modem & TRX loop

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

Unit Name Test Item Contents Results

Controller/

Data terminal

DGT CKT

x Memory1 :FROM operation

x Memory2 :EEPROM operation

x Memory3 :SDRAM operation

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

AF output AF connection to TRX OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

LCD&LED

Screen and ALM lamp display operation

Note: Check visually if every dot and red and

green ALM lamp alternately work normally

for 3 seconds.

DONE

Speaker

Sound test

Note: Check if the 1500 Hz tone sounds correctly.

After that, press ENT on the popup screen

to finish this process.

DONE

Printer

Print out test

Note: When the printer is connected, check the

print result in the printed data output.

DONE

DTE

・ DTE memory1 :FROM operation

・ DTE memory2 :SDRAM operation

OK: Normal

NG: Abnormal

・ DTE LCD&LED :Data terminal screen and

lamp operation

Note: Check visually if every dot alternating colors

of red, green, blue and white with the lamp

blink work normally for 5 seconds.

DONE

・ DTE buzzer :DTE buzzer operation

Note: Check if the buzzer sounds correctly. After 3

seconds, sounding stops automatically

DONE

Maintenance & Inspection

6-5

6.3 System alarm indication

This equipment displays alarms as follows when an internal or external error is detected.

- To return to the previous screen after the alarm is displayed, press the

CANCEL key.

- When the TRX 024.PLL unlock or WKR MODEM 030.PLL unlock alarm is

occurring, that mark remains as shown below until the equipment is restored

to normal conditions.

Alarm information

PA :001,Overcurrent(A)

PA :008,High-temp

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

Unlock

Note

Maintenance & Inspection

6-6

6.3.1 Alarm list

The following list shows the types of system alarms and contents when an alarm is detected on

the equipment.

(*) 500W model only

Alarm

Number

Source

Unit Display Contents Troubleshooting

Procedure

001 PA Overcurrent (A)

Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at

AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(A).

Re-tune or operate on

another frequency.

002 PA Overload (A) Detected the condition SWR > 3 in

the PA(A).

Re-tune or operate on

another frequency.

003 PA Overcurrent (B) * Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at

AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(B).

Re-tune or operate on

another frequency.

004 PA Overload (B) *

Detected the condition SWR > 3 in

the PA(B).

Re-tune or operate on

another frequency.

007 PA SWR/Overload

Detected the condition SWR > 3 or

overload at the PA output.

Re-tune or operate on

another frequency.

008 PA

High-temp On TX, detected high temp (99°C or

more) at the radiator in the PA unit.

Stop transmission, or

reduce output.

010 PA RBK overcurrent Detected RBK overcurrent. Please contact JRC or

our agency.

011 PA High-VDD (A)

Detected overvoltage (132V or more)

at the drain of the FET in the PA(A).

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

012 PA Low-VDD (A) Detected low voltage (80V or less)

at the drain of the PA(A) FET.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

013 PA High-VDD (B) *

Detected overvoltage (132V or more)

at the drain of the FET in the PA(B).

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

014 PA Low-VDD (B) * Detected low voltage (80V or less)

at the drain of the PA(B) FET.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

066 PA DA high-temp

Detected high temperature (95°C or

more) at the radiator of the DA.

Stop transmission, or

reduce output.

067 PA

High-temp (A) Detected high temperature (99°C or

more) at the radiator of the PA(A).

Stop transmission, or

reduce output.

068 PA

High-temp (B) * Detected high temperature (99°C or

more) at the radiator of the PA(B).

Stop transmission, or

reduce output.

070 PA EEPROM (PA) Detected the PA memory error. Please contact JRC or

our agency.

091 PA

EEPROM

(PACONT)

Detected a memory error at the PA

CONTROL UNIT.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

071 PS PS for PA Detected abnormal condition (high

temp/voltage) of the PS for PA.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

017 ATU ATU lost Detected a serial communication

error with the tuner.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

018 ATU High voltage Detected a high voltage (3.5 kV or

more) in antenna output.

Re-tune, or reduce

output.

019 ATU High-temp Detected an out-of-range temperature

(70°C or more) inside the enclosure.

Stop transmission, or

reduce output.

072 ATU Overcurrent Detected an overcurrent at the

antenna.

Re-tune, or reduce

output.

020 TRX DISP_KEY

Detected abnormal ON signal at the

PTT or Ext key of the controller.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

021 TRX EXT_KEY Detected abnormal ON signal at the

transceiver external key.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

022 TRX SEL_BK Detected abnormal ON signal at

the Selcall key on the transceiver.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

023 TRX -BK Detected the -BK output error

during transmission.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

024 TRX PLL unlock Detected PLL unlock for the DDS

or DUC clock.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

030 WKR

MODEM PLL unlock Detected PLL unlock for the DDS

clock.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

031 WKR

MODEM MCDSP WDT Detected MCDSP malfunction. Please contact JRC or

our agency.

032 WKR

MODEM VDSP WDT Detected VDSP malfunction. Please contact JRC or

our agency.

Maintenance & Inspection

6-7

033 WKR

MODEM MMSI lost Detected non-registration or loss

of the ship's MMSI.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

094 WKR

MODEM Memory Detected a memory error. Please contact JRC or

our agency.

035 Controller CTRL1 RBK OC Detected an overcurrent on the

RBK circuit of controller 1.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

036 Controller CTRL1 PTT Detected an error on the PTT control

line of controller 1.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

037 Controller CTRL1 CW KEY Detected an error on the CW key control

line of controller 1.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

038 Controller CTRL1 EXT KEY Detected an error on the external key

control line of controller 1.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

039 Controller CTRL2 RBK OC Detected an overcurrent on the

RBK circuit of controller 2.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

040 Controller CTRL2 PTT Detected an error on the PTT control

line of controller 2.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

041 Controller CTRL2 CW KEY Detected an error on the CW key control

line of controller 2.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

042 Controller CTRL2 EXT KEY Detected an error on the external key

control line of controller 2.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

047 Controller PA lost Detected a serial communication

error with the PA.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

048 Controller TRX lost Detected a serial communication

error with the TRX.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

050 Controller MODEM lost Detected a serial communication

error with the WKR MODEM.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

051 Controller CTRL1 lost Detected a serial communication

error with the No.1 controller.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

052 Controller CTRL2 lost Detected a serial communication

error with the No.2 controller.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

095 Controller CTRL1 memory Detected a memory error on the

No.1 controller.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

096 Controller CTRL2 memory Detected a memory error on the

No.2 controller.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

059 Data

terminal My/OTH DTE lost

Detected a serial communication

error between controller (ID:1)

and DTE.

Note) My or OTH indicates the

relationship between that data

terminal and the controller

displaying this alarm.

Check the data

terminal cable

connection, or the

condition of the data

terminal.

060 Data

terminal My/OTH DTE lost

Detected a serial communication

error between controller (ID:2)

and DTE.

Note) My or OTH indicates the

relationship between that data

terminal and the controller

displaying this alarm.

Check the data

terminal cable

connection, or the

condition of the data

terminal.

062 Data

terminal

My/OTH DTE

USB-IC

Detected the SPI communication

error at the USB circuit of the

data terminal connected to the

controller (ID:1).

Note) My or OTH indicates the

relationship between that data

terminal and the controller

displaying this alarm.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

063 Data

terminal

My/OTH DTE

USB-IC

Detected the SPI communication

error at the USB circuit of the

data terminal connected to the

controller (ID:2).

Note) My or OTH indicates the

relationship between that data

terminal and the controller

displaying this alarm.

Please contact JRC or

our agency.

Maintenance & Inspection

6-8

Also, the following alarms are displayed when an error is detected just after turning on the

equipment. Please notify JRC or our agency of the details of the alarm.

Display Contents

Detected this controller's barcode number lost!

So required to replace the CONTROL UNIT in it

with the new one.

Detected an error in the barcode number on the

controller.

Detected this controller's SIO error!

So required initial set after restarting as the

maintenance mode.

Detected a communication error between the

controller and transceiver at startup.

Detected this controller's address setting error!

So required initial set after restarting as the

maintenance mode.

Detected this controller's address error when

starting the controller.

Detected MMSI lost!

So concerned DSC functions no longer available

now.

Unregistered MMSI, or lost the MMSI.

Detected PA UNIT lost or this controller's SIO error!

So required initial set after restarting as the

maintenance mode.

Detected malfunction of the PA unit or

communication error on the controller.

Detected TRX UNIT lost!

So concerned all functions no longer available

now.

Detected TRX unit malfunction.

Maintenance & Inspection

6-9

6.3.2 Viewing the alarm history

The following describes how to view alarm information detected by the equipment or a history of

past occurring alarms in the 6.2 Alarm information menu.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Press the MENU key, and through

hierarchical menus, select 6.2 Alarm

information.

One of the screens shown at right is

displayed indicating if an alarm is

occurring.

The displayed alarm information is

formatted as follows.

[Unit Name] : [Alarm Number], [Information]

2

2.

.

To check the alarm history, press ENT.

The popup screen at right is displayed,

select OK.

3

3.

.

The alarm history is displayed.

Up to 100 of the latest histories are stored.

If necessary, scroll with the jog dial.

The displayed alarm history is

formatted as follows.

[Number] [Alarm & recovery time] [A: Alarm/V: Recovery]

[Unit name] : [Alarm number], [Information]

6.2)Alarm information

No data

Press ENT to view alarm history.

(If there is an alarm)

Note

(If there is no alarm)

6.2)Alarm information

No data

Press ENT to view alarm history.

View alarm history?

[ OK ] [Cancel]

Alarm history

1.2008-12-31 23:59 A

PA :001,Overcurrent(A)

2.2008-12-31 23:59 A

PA :008,High-temp

3.2008-11-30 22:45 V

ATU :019,High-temp

4.2008-11-28 22:11 V

ATU :018,High voltage

6.2)Alarm information

PA :001,Overcurrent(A)

PA :008,High-temp

Press ENT to view alarm history.

Maintenance & Inspection

6-10

6.4 Software version

■ Procedure ■

To view the version of the software currently

running on the equipment, press the MENU

key, and display 6.3 Software version in the

menu list.

¾ Each software version of the transceiver,

the controller and the data terminal is

displayed as shown at right.

¾ Besides above, the software version of the

data terminal is displayed through the Help

menu.

6.3)Software version

- Controller :05.00

- WKR MODEM :03.00

- TRX :01.00

- PA :01.00

- ATU :01.00

- DTE :01.00

0.Back

Maintenance & Inspection

6-11

6.5 Troubleshooting

WARNING

This equipment is used for both distress communication and routine

communication.

Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine

operation or inspection.

Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection

or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire,

electrical shock, or malfunction.

If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or

agents.

6.5.1 Procedures for locating malfunctions

1) First, check the power supply voltage and connectors.

2) If there are no problems with the above, use a tester to check for errors.

The following table shows the instruments required for performing repairs and the severity of

malfunctions. If the user is to locate the malfunction himself, perform only No. 1 and No. 2.

No. Type of Malfunction Examples

1

Faults requiring no instrument to locate

・ Faulty connector contacts

・ Broken antenna cables

・ Defective switches, controls, etc.

・ Other problems that can be visually detected

2 Malfunctions that can be discovered

and repaired with a tester

・ Confirmation of power supply voltage

・ Breaks in external wiring

3

Malfunctions requiring special instrument

・ Fan malfunction in transceiver and ATU

enclosure fan

・ Crystal oscillator frequency deviation

・ Decrease in transmitting power and reception

sensitivity

・ Decrease in transmitter modulation level

・ Malfunction in semiconductors, ICs, and similar

devices

Maintenance & Inspection

6-12

6.5.2 Guide to locating faults

Use the following table as a guide to locating the causes of malfunctions in the equipment. Also,

when contacting JRC or our agency, please notify us of the malfunction conditions.

No. Symptom Typical causes

1

Nothing is displayed on the

controller or the data terminal

screen.

x Malfunction in the controller or data terminal cable

x Abnormal power supply voltage

x Malfunction in the power switch, display circuit or control

circuit

2

TX and ON is displayed but no

voice is transmitted in the TEL

mode.

x Malfunction in the handset

x Malfunction in the controller cable

x Malfunction in the AF signal transmission circuit

3 TX is displayed but ON is not,

and transmission is not possible. x Malfunction in the transmission circuit

4 TX and ON are displayed, and

transmission is not possible.

x Malfunction in the handset PTT switch (TEL mode)

x Malfunction in the electrical key connection (CW mode)

x Malfunction in the transmission circuit

5 Reception sensitivity is poor.

x Antenna damage

x Break or short circuit of antenna cable

x Malfunction in the antenna connectors

x Malfunction in the receiver circuit

6 Little or no sound from the

speaker, both static and voices.

x Malfunction in the speaker

x Malfunction in the receiver circuit

7

Radio static (noise) is output

from the speaker, but cannot

receive transmissions from other

stations.

x Antenna damage

x Break or short circuit of antenna cable

x Malfunction in the antenna connectors

x Malfunction in the receiver

The following are not faults.

Symptom Possible Causes Handling

Both Tx & Rx functions are invalid,

and the SIG meter indicates

off-the-scale.

The external BK line is ON. Stop operating the external

equipment.

The VOL control, the dimmer, and

PWR key on the controller are valid

but functions such as the RF GAIN

control are invalid.

Multiple controllers are connected,

and another controller has access

rights.

Press ENT to obtain access

rights, and after that, retry

the operation.

No response from other station via

radiotelephone or DSC call.

No operator in that station, or

unavailable to respond due to other

duties.

Wait and retry later.

When multiple controllers are

connected, access rights cannot be

obtained by pressing ENT on a

monitor controller.

Another controller with higher

priority is in use for communicating

or is performing menu operations.

After operations on the other

controller are finished,

obtain access rights.

If the system is left on a screen

other than the status display for a

while, the screen returns to the

status display.

The inactivity timer is activated and

the menu is closed.

Set the timer with the 7.3.6

Menu shutdown.

The received distress call log has

been erased without operation.

Automatically deleted the received

distress calls of 48 hours old after

that reception. (IMO A.806(19))

Or the equipment had been turned

off by such as the breaker on the

power supply.

Print and save received

messages if necessary.

When turning on the data terminal,

the start screen is displayed. But

after that, nothing is displayed.

The dimmer level is adjusted to 0

with such as Ctrl+È operation.

Adjust the dimmer level with

the DIM key on the panel of

the data terminal or Ctrl+Ç

operation.

Note

Maintenance & Inspection

6-13

6.5.3 Consumables

The following shows consumables. Please contact JRC or our agency to order parts.

Location Description Model (Part number) Replacement Guide

NKG-91 PRINTER Printer paper 7ZPJD0384

Indicating red mark on the

paper edge

DPU-414 PRINTER Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A

NKG-800 PRINTER

Printer paper 5ZPCM00020

Ink ribbon (SP-16051)

5ZZCM00003 When print becomes light

6.5.4 Repair units/parts

The repair units and replacement part units are as follows.

z NTD-2250/ 2500 TRANSCEIVER

Description Model (Part number) Notes

PA CONTROL UNIT CMC-2425/ 2450

PA UNIT CAH-2425/ 2450

LPF UNIT CFJ-2425/ 2450

EXTERNAL UNIT CQD-2419 Common for 250W and 500W

TRX UNIT CMN-2250 Common for 250W and 500W

WKR MODEM UNIT CMJ-2250 Common for 250W and 500W

z NBD-2250/ 2500 POWER SUPPLY

Description Model (Part number) Notes

DC_DC UNIT CBG-2415 Common for 250W and 500W

PA_PS UNIT CBG-2416 Common for 250W and 500W

Note) 2pcs for 500W

FILTER UNIT CBL-2415 Common for 250W and 500W

Air filter MTZ304438A Everlight scott filter

z NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER

Description Model (Part number) Notes

CONTROL UNIT CDJ-3775

AF CONT UNIT CMV-3775

LCD UNIT CDE-3770

MAIN PANEL UNIT CCK-3775

SUB PANEL UNIT CCK-3776

SPEAKER 7USJD0007

CONTROLLER CABLE 7ZCJD0343 Control cable (5 m)

Maintenance & Inspection

6-14

z NFC-2250/ 2500 ANTENNA TUNER

Description Model (Part number) Notes

MATCHING UNIT CFG-2250 For 250W only

MATCHING A UNIT CFG-2500 For 500W only

MATCHING B UNIT CFG-2503 For 500W only

ANT SW UNIT CSD-2250/ 2500

TUNER CONT CDJ-2525 Common for 250W and 500W

z NDZ-227 DATA TERMINAL

Description Model (Part number) Notes

PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1346B

INTERFACE UNIT CMH-3227

COLOR LCD UNIT CCN-3227 10.4 inch

LCD I/F UNIT CQC-1262

USB I/F UNIT CQD-3227

z NBB-714 BATTERY CHARGER

Description Model (Part number) Notes

AC fuse 7ZFJD0002 10A

NBB714_Dustfilter NBB714-FIL

NBB714_Fan NBB714-FAN

z NBB-724 BATTERY CHARGER

Description Model (Part number) Notes

NBB724_Dustfilter NBB724-FIL

NBB724_Fan NBB724-FAN

6.5.5 Regular replacement parts

The following shows parts that need to be replaced regularly. Please contact JRC or our agency

to order parts.

Description Model (Part number) Replacement Period

Cooling fan for PA and PS 7BZJD0006 Approx. 50,000 hours of use at

room temperature

Cooling fan for ATU 7BZJD0008 Approx. 50,000 hours of use at

room temperature

LCD unit for controller CDE-3770

Approx. 20,000 hours of continued

use at maximum brightness

LCD unit for data terminal CCN-3227

Approx. 50,000 hours of continued

use at maximum brightness

After-Sales Service

7-1

7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE

★ Warranty

The warranty period is determined by JRC's warranty regulations, but is normally

1 year from the date of purchase. Additionally, the warranty except for the body text is

submitted to contractual agreements.

★ Repair Part Inventory Period

Parts necessary for proper functioning of this equipment will be kept available for 10

years after product discontinuation.

★ When Requesting Repairs

If what appears to be a defect is detected, refer to "6.5 Troubleshooting" to check if

the equipment is actually defective.

If the problem is due to a defect, immediately stop use of the system and contact the

store where you purchased the system, or one of our branches.

z During the warranty period , if a malfunction occurs with the equipment while

in standard usage in accordance with this instruction manual, we or our

agencies will repair the malfunction at no charge at the store where the

equipment was purchased or another location specified by JRC. If the

malfunction occurs due to improper usage, fault (including the use of the virus-

infected USB flash memory), or any external abnormal condition such as fire,

pollution, abnormal voltage, natural disaster (ex. thunder storms, earthquake)

etc., JRC will repair the equipment for a fee. Furthermore, regardless of the

warranty period, orders of consumables will be charged.

z After the warranty expires , we will repair the malfunction for a fee, if repair is

possible.

z Please inform us of the following :

☆ Product name, model name, manufactured date, serial number

☆ As much information as you can provide about the malfunction (alarm

number, whether transmission is possible or not, etc.)

☆ Your company or organization name, address, and phone number

★ Periodical Maintenance Recommendation

Depending on the usage conditions, with extended use, the performance of this

equipment may degrade over time, and externally installed parts such as the antenna

may degrade due to vibration, so we recommend periodical maintenance in addition

to the standard maintenance.

Please contact the store where you purchased the equipment, or one of our

branches, to request periodical maintenance.

Periodical maintenance requires a service charge.

If you have any questions regarding after-sales service, please contact the store where

you purchased the equipment, or one of our branches.

Refer to the inside of the back cover for contact numbers and locations.

Disposal

8-1

8. DISPOSAL

Observe all rules and regulations of the local authorities when disposing of this

equipment.

Specifications

9-1

9. SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment

z General Specifications

Transmission frequency 1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz (100 Hz steps)

Reception frequency 90.0 - 29999.9 kHz (100 Hz steps)

Frequency stability Within ±10 Hz

Type of emission TEL mode : J3E

DSC/TLX mode : F1B

CW mode : A1A

AM mode : H3E

H2B mode : H2B

DATA mode : J2D

Channels User channels (TEL/DSC/CW) : Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 grp)

User channels (TLX) : Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 sta)

ITU preset channels : 1722 ch

Scan channels Max. 20 channels (group specification method)

Nominal frequency J3E/ A1A/ H3E/ H2B/ J2D : Carrier frequencies

F1B : Assigned frequency

Communication method in TEL Push-to-talk (simplex, semi-duplex)

Antenna impedance 50 unbalanced

Channel switching duration 15 sec or less

Interface IEC61162-1 (GPS/AME/RMS)

Compass safety distance 2.0 m

Main controls DSC call (sending and receiving), communication freq/

channel settings, Tx power settings, RF gain adjustment,

volume adjustment, LCD adjustment

Performance criteria IMO A.806(19), A.694(17), MSC68(68), MSC/Circ.862

IEC 60945 Ed.4 2002-08

Power supply voltage 90 VAC to 132 VAC, 180 VAC to 264 VAC

24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 31.2 VDC)

Current consumption

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

Transmission AC : 2kVA / 3kVA

24VDC : 40A / 40A

Reception AC : 0.5kVA / 0.5kVA

24VDC : 6A / 6A

Operating temperature range -30 to +55oC (-15 to +55 oC during normal operation)

Storage temperature range -30 to +55°C (parts exposed to condensation -30 to +70°C)

Humidity resistance No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93%RH

Vibration resistance (3 axes) 2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz : Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%

13.2 Hz to 100 Hz : Max acceleration 7 m/s2 fixed

No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz for 2 hours

Continuous operation (TEL) No abnormality after operating continuously for 8 hours

Continuous operation (DSC,WKR) No abnormality after operating continuously for 24 hours

Category type of

the weather resistance

Antenna tuner and the junction box : Exposed

Other units : Protected

Protection rating IP22 equivalent (controller panel)

Dimensions and mass (approx)

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

Main unit (Incase of the NCU-515A Rack)

520mm(W) x 665mm(H) x 450mm(D) [ex. projections], 90kg/96kg

Antenna tuner

395mm(W) x 622mm(H) x 198mm(D) [ex. projections], 10kg/10kg

MF/HF controller

230mm(W) x 142mm(H) x 89mm(D) [ex. projections], 1.3kg

Data terminal

336mm(W) x 244mm(H) x 88mm(D) [ex. projections], 4.6kg

Specifications

9-2

z Transmitter

Antenna output power

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

1605.0

- 3999.9 kHz

AC ： 200Wpep / 400Wpep

24VDC ： 100Wpep / 100Wpep

4000.0

- 27500.0 kHz

AC ： 250Wpep / 500Wpep

24VDC ： 150Wpep / 150Wpep

Modulation method Low-power stage balanced modulation

Occupied bandwidth J3E/ J2D/ H2B : Within 3 kHz

F1B/ A1A : Within 0.5 kHz

Carrier suppression (J3E) 40 dB or more

Unwanted emissions in the

out-of-band domain

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

Mean power of 50 mW or lower, or 67/70 dB or more lower

than the mean power of the basic frequency

Unwanted emissions in the

spurious domain

JSS-2250/2500

At J3E:

1.5 to 4.5 kHz : 28/28 dB or more

4.5 to 7.5 kHz : 35/35 dB or more

7.5 kHz and upwards : 64/67 dB or more

At F1B:

0.25 to 0.5 kHz : 28/28 dB or more

0.50 to 1.25 kHz : 35/35 dB or more

1.25 kHz and upwards : 67/70 dB or more

And following

Mistuned frequency [Hz]

A

ttenuation [dB]

Overall distortion and noise -20 dB or less

AF frequency response Deviation is within 6 dB in 350 Hz to 2700 Hz range.

Tone frequency 1500 Hz or 1400 Hz

z Receiver

Receiving system Double superheterodyne

1st IF 70.036 MHz

2nd IF 36 kHz

Reception frequency stability Within ±10 Hz

Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB) J3E : 2.5 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

F1B : 0.7 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

A1A : 1.4 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)

Pass band/Adjacent signal

selectivity

J3E : 2.4 - 3.0 kHz (6 dB bandwidth) within

±2.1 kHz (66 dB bandwidth)

F1B : 270 - 300Hz (6 dB bandwidth) within

±550 Hz (60 dB bandwidth)

Spurious response J3E : 60 dB or more

F1B : Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted

signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal

level of 31.6 mV separated by 750 Hz

Blocking/Desensitization J3E : When an unwanted signal level separated by 3

kHz is added to the wanted signal level of 10

uV, the unwanted signal input voltage

suppressing output of the wanted signal by 3

dB is 10 mV or more.

F1B : Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted

signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal

level of 1 mV separated by 500 Hz

Specifications

9-3

Overall distortion and noise When an input signal level of 30 uV is applied, the ratio

between low-frequency output 1000 Hz and unwanted

components contained in that output is 30 dB or more.

Conducted spurious emission Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less (9kHz

- 2GHz) and 20 nW or less (2GHz - 4GHz).

Clarifier variable range ±200 Hz (1 Hz steps)

Antenna impedance 50 unbalanced

Line output 0 dBm 600 (balanced)

z DSC Watch Keeping Receiver

Reception frequency Distress and safety frequencies of 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5

kHz, and additionally on one or more of the 4207.5 kHz/

6312.0 kHz/ 12577.0 kHz/ 16804.5 kHz

Receiving system Double superheterodyne

1st IF 40.04025 MHz

2nd IF 40.25 kHz

Frequency stability Within ±10 Hz

Sensitivity 1% or lower symbol error rate at reception input voltage of

1µV

Passband 6 dB bandwidth : 270 - 300 Hz

30 dB bandwidth : Within ±380 Hz

60 dB bandwidth : Within ±550 Hz

Spurious response Symbol error rate of 1% or better when an unwanted signal

level of 31.6 mV is applied to a wanted signal level of 10

uv from an intermediate frequency separated by 750 Hz or

more through to a frequency 3x the test frequency

Blocking/Desensitization Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted signal level

of 10 uV and an unwanted signal level of 1 mV separated

by 500 Hz

Conducted spurious emission Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less.

Antenna impedance 50 unbalanced

z DSC Modem

Modulation rate Within 100 baud ±30ｘ10-6

Modulation method FSK (sub-carrier: 1700 Hz)

Mark frequency (Y) Transmission : Within 1615 Hz ±0.5 Hz

Reception (permissible value) : Within 1615 Hz ±20 Hz

Space frequency (B) Transmission : Within 1785 Hz ±0.5 Hz

Reception (permissible value) : Within 1785 Hz ±20 Hz

DSC Protocol ITU-R recommendation M.493-13 (Class A and B)

DSC operation standards ITU-R recommendation M.541-9, M.821-1

DSC code 10-bit error detecting code

Message storage 20 Rx distress, 20 Rx others, 20 Tx messages

z NBDP Modem

Modulation rate Within 100baud ±30ｘ10-6 以内

Modulation method FSK （sub-carrier：1700Hz）

Mark frequency (Y) Transmission : Within 1615 Hz ±0.5 Hz

Reception (permissible value) : Within 1615 Hz ±20 Hz

Space frequency (B) Transmission : Within 1785 Hz ±0.5 Hz

Reception (permissible value) : Within 1785 Hz ±20 Hz

NBDP Protocol ITU-R recommendation M.476-5,M.491-1,M.492-6,M.625-4

ITU-T recommendation F.1, F.130, S.6

NBDP code 7-bit error detecting code

Specifications

9-4

z Antenna tuner

Frequency range 1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz

Maximum input power

(JSS-2250/ 2500)

1605.0 - 3999.9 kHz 250Wpep / 500Wpep

4000.0 - 27500.0 kHz 300Wpep / 700Wpep

SWR after tuning 2:1 or less

Tuning method Preset or auto-tuning

Tuning time Preset tuning: 0.5 seconds, auto-tuning: max. 45 seconds

Power supply 24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 24.7 VDC)

z MF/HF controller

Communication speed 57.6 kbps

Communication interface RS-485 and RS-232C, and Centronics compliant

Microphone input impedance 150 balanced

Standard modulation input -54 dBm

Audio output Internal loud speaker (8) : 5W max

External speaker impedance : 8 or more

Handset phone (150) : Rated 1mW or more

LCD display 3.8 inch FSTN monochrome, 320 x 240 dot, LED backlight

z Data terminal

Communication speed 4.8kbps

Communication interface RS-232C

USB interface USB 2.0, FAT16/32 file format

Keyboard interface PS/2

Printer interface Centronics compliant

LCD display 10.4 inch TFT color, 640x480 dots, CCFL backlight

Standard brightness 450cd/m2, Viewing angle 160 ﾟ/140 ﾟ

Contrast 600：1

● Keyboard

Communication interface Serial two wire interactive transmission

Connector Mini DIN 5Pin

Durability 20,000,000 times

● Printer (NKG-800/NKG-900)

Printing system Serial impact dot matrix

Communication interface Centronics compliant

Supported fonts ANK FX850 mode 324 characters

IBM Proprinter II mode 264 characters

Paper feed system Roll paper holder

Paper type 209 - 216 mm (8.23 - 8.50") roll paper

Buffer size ANK FX850 mode 21 kbytes

IBM Proprinter II mode 9.3 kbytes

Density adjustment Manual (non-stepped)

Power supply voltage 10.2 VDC - 31.2 VDC

Power consumption Maximum 35 W

Specifications

9-5

9.2 Options

(1) Battery charger (NBB-714)

Source voltage 90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz)

Current consumption Charging : 8 A or less (100 VAC input)

4 A or less (220 VAC input)

Discharging : 0.3 A or less (at 24 VDC ope)

Charging current Maximum 10 A

Charging circuit/ characteristic Floating charge

16 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic

Less than 16 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*

(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic

Functions Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection,

Dimmer lamp, Alarm mute with remote control

Alarm type Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature, AC fail,

Other abnormal charging

Temperature range for full performance

-15°C - +55°C

Operating temperature range -15°C - +55°C

Storage temperature range -25°C - +65°C

Humidity resistance No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93% RH

Vibration resistance (3 axes) 2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz: : Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%

13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: : Maximum acceleration 7

m/s2 fixed

No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz

for more than 2 hours

(2) Battery charger (NBB-724)

Source voltage 90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz)

Current consumption Charging : 15 A or less (100 VAC input)

8 A or less (220 VAC input)

Discharging : 0.5 A or less (at 24 VDC ope)

Charging current Maximum 22 A (Common to Floating & Equalizing charge)

Charging circuit/ characteristic Floating charge and equalizing charge

18 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic

Less than 18 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*

(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic

Functions Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection,

Dimmer lamp, Float/Equal changing, DC ope, Batt temp

Alarm type Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature,

Other abnormal charging

Temperature range for full performance

-15°C - +55°C

Operating temperature range -15°C - +55°C

Storage temperature range -25°C - +65°C

Humidity resistance No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93% RH

Vibration resistance (3 axes) 2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz: : Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%

13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: : Maximum acceleration 7

m/s2 fixed

No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz

for more than 2 hours

Specifications

9-6

(3) Printer (NKG-91)

Printing system Thermal line dot

Communication interface RS-232C, 4.8/9.6/38.4 kbps

Data control RTS/CTS

Data buffer 4096 byte

Maximum print speed 20 mm/sec or more

Roll paper width 58 mm

Power supply voltage 6.5 VDC (5 VDC to 8.7 VDC)

Current consumption Maximum 2 A

(4) Printer (DPU-414)

Printing system Thermal serial dot

Communication interface RS-232C, 4.8k/9.6k/38.4 kbps

Data control HW busy

Data buffer About 28 Kbyte

Maximum print speed 52.5 cps

Roll paper width 112 mm

Power voltage 6.5 VDC

Current consumption Maximum 2 A

Specifications

9-7

9.3 Peripheral interfaces

(1) GPS or other navigation aid interface

Interface standard NMEA0183/ IEC61162-1 Ed.4 (2010-11) compliant

Protocol 4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit

Non parity

Input sentence

NMEA0183 V1.5: GGA/ GLL/ RMC

V2.0: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ ZDA

V2.3: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ GNS/ ZDA

(Talker = "GP" or other)

Data type

Ship position & time information: GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC

Date information: ZDA/ RMC

Equipment time information: ZDA/ GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC

(1.1) Electrical description

■ Load requirements

Current consumption ：2mA at 2V or less

Maximum input voltage ：±15V or more

Recommended operating current ：2mA or more

CMC-2425/2450

PA CONTROL

UNIT

CQD-2417

TERMINAL

BOARD

TB204

26

27

GPS_RX-A

GPS_RX-B

J202

W30

J102 J172

CMN-2250

TRX UNIT

J1111 J1131

W13

CMJ-2250

WKR MODEM UNIT

J502

W14 1

2

+3.3V

PHT501

CD503

R541

R542

R543

R544

TR501

TR502

R541, R543: 270

R542, R544: 10k

R540

3.3k

Specifications

9-8

(1.2) List of sentences and associated data fields

(1.2.1) GGA – Global positioning system (GPS) fix data

$--GGA, hhmmss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x, xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx *hh<CR><LF>

Differential reference

station ID, 0000-1023

Age of differential GPS data

Units of geoidal separation, m

Geoidal separation

Units of antenna altitude, m

Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level

(geoid)

Horizontal dilution of precision

Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different

from the number in view

GPS quality indicator

Longitude E/W

Latitude N/S

UTC of position

(1.2.2) GLL – Geographic position – Latitude/longitude

$--GLL, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss, A, a *hh<CR><LF>

Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous, D = Differential, E = Estimated

M = Manual input, S = Simulator, N = Data not valid

Status: A= data valid, V= data invalid

UTC of position

Longitude, E/W

Latitude, N/S

Specifications

9-9

(1.2.3) RMC – Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

$--RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a, a, a *hh<CR><LF>

Navigational status

Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous, D = Differential,

E = Estimated, F = Float RTK,

M = Manual input, N = Data not valid

P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic

S = Simulator,

Magnetic variation, degrees, E/W

Date: dd/mm/yy

Course over ground, degrees true

Speed over ground, knots

Longitude, E/W

Latitude, N/S

Status: A = data valid, V = navigation receiver warning

UTC of position fix

(1.2.4) GNS – GNSS fix data

$--GNS, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, c---c, xx, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, a *hh<CR><LF>

Navigational status

Differential reference

station ID

Age of differential data

Geoidal separation, m

Antenna altitude, m, re: mean-sea-level

(geoid)

HDOP

Total number of satellites in use, 00-99

Mode indicator:

N = No fix, A = Autonomous, D = Differential,

P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic, F = Float RTK,

E = Estimated, M = Manual input, S = Simulator

Longitude, E/W

Latitude, N/S

UTC of position

Specifications

9-10

(1.2.5) ZDA – Time and date

$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, xxxx, xx, xx *hh<CR><LF>

Local zone minutes, 00 to +59

Local zone hours, 00 h to ±13 h

Year (UTC)

Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)

Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)

UTC

(2) RMS interface

Interface standard IEC61162-1 compliant

Protocol 4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit

Non parity

Output message

IEC61162-1 compliant proprietary sentence

$PJRCL sentence (for RMS log saving)

$PJRCM sentence

(Device ID = "CT")

Data type Model number, serial number, self-diagnosis information,

etc.

Options Operation

10-1

10. OPTIONS OPERATION

10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714)

CAUTION

When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type.

1. 10A fuse ························ AC mains fuses (2pcs)

2. AC switch ······················ Turns on the AC mains power supply.

3. BATT LOW/HIGH lamp ···· This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low

voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V). And also turns on and

the buzzer sounds to indicate overvoltage of the battery

(approx. 32.2 ~ 37.0V) and then, turns off the BATT breaker.

4. AC FAIL/ CHG ALARM ···· This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate any one

of the following alarms.

・ While the BATT breaker is ON, the AC switch is OFF or any

AC fails such as the power failure or the blowout of fuses.

・ While the AC switch is ON, the BATT breaker is OFF.

・ Over discharge detection (16V or less)

Note) If AC input is ON, charging is available without

tripping the breaker.

・ Overheat detection (+80C)

5. Current meter ················ Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-).

6. ALM MUTE switch ·········· Silences the active alarm buzzer sound.

7. Alarm buzzer

8. Voltage meter ················ Indicates the output voltage of the battery.

9. Dimmer control ·············· Adjusts the dimmer level of alarm lamps.

Note) Unable to turn off completely.

10. BATT breaker ················· When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery,

and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of

the battery. Note that if detected over discharge of the

battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically.

346 7 910

1

58

2

Options Operation

10-2

■ Procedure ■

Turn on the AC switch and the BATT breaker to start charging the battery.

¾ The AC FAIL/CHG ALARM is activated if the AC switch and BATT breaker are turned ON

at different timing. However it is due to the notification function of the switch/breaker

ON/OFF state and is NOT the alarm for any malfunction.

¾ The NBB-714 is a battery charger for the maintenance free battery only, i.e. the

charging type is floating only and not providing the equalizing charge.

■ Replacing fuses ■

To replace fuses, turn off the AC switch and the BATT breaker first, and then unscrew the

both two fuse cases as shown below to replace them.

Note) The appearance of the blowout fuses look like normal. So when checking if the

fuses are blown or not, always use the tester.

・ The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is

ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over

discharge condition.

・ When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows.

- BATT HIGH ······················ When the battery overvoltage (32.2~37.0V) is

detected, trips the BATT breaker. In this case,

turn off the AC switch. And then, after the

voltage is recovered to normal, turn on the AC

switch and the BATT breaker.

Note) In this case, the charge alarm is also

detected due to the BATT breaker trip and the

CHG ALARM is activated.

- BATT LOW ······················· Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared

automatically after the battery voltage increases

to approx. 23.5V.

- AC FAIL/CHG ALARM ········· - Turn on the AC input/switch.

- After checking that the battery voltage is not

overvoltage, turn on the BATT breaker.

- If the battery is over discharge condition (16V),

turn on both the AC switch and the BATT breaker

to charge the battery.

- High temperature ·············· The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until

the temperature returns to the normal condition

(60℃ or lower) automatically

Note

Options Operation

10-3

10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724)

CAUTION

The batteries, except for sealed lead-acid batteries that require no

equalization, should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six

months

3 5

4 6

7 8 910

1. AC breaker ·················· When turned on, enables to use the AC mains input.

2. BATT breaker ··············· When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery,

and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of

the battery. Note that if detected over discharge of the

battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically.

3. BATT LOW alarm lamp ··· This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low

voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V).

4. CHG alarm lamp ·········· This lamp turns on (or blinks*) and the buzzer sounds to

indicate any one of the following alarms.

・The BATT breaker is OFF while the AC breaker is ON.

・Over voltage (equalizing charge voltage + 1.0V)

・High temperature of the charging circuit (+75℃) *

5. FLOAT charge lamp ······ This lamp turns on during the floating charge operation.

6. EQUAL charge lamp ····· This lamp turns on during the equalizing charge operation.

7.

CHARGE mode switch ····

Changes the charge mode between floating and equalizing charge.

8. Dimmer control ············ Adjusts the dimmer level.

9. Current meter ·············· Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-).

10. Voltage meter ·············· Indicates the output voltage of the battery.

1 2

Options Operation

10-4

(1) Charging a battery in the floating mode

■ Procedure ■

Turn on the AC and BATT breakers.

¾ FLOAT lamp turns on during the floating charge operation.

¾ When turning on the AC breaker prior to BATT breaker, CHG alarm lamp turns on and

the buzzer sounds. But this is not malfunction as mentioned above.

(2) Charging a battery in the equalizing mode

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Turn on the AC and BATT breakers.

Make sure FLOAT lamp is turned on and the battery charge is started in the floating mode.

2

2.

.

Press the CHARGE mode switch.

¾ The lighting lamp is changed from FLOAT to EQUAL to indicate operating in the

equalizing mode.

¾ The charging mode can be switched between FLOAT and EQUAL alternately.

3

3.

.

When the equalizing charge is completed, returns to the floating mode automatically.

The equalizing charge is continued until the charge current goes down to approx. 3.0A or

until 10 hours elapse.

・ The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is

ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over

discharge condition.

・ When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows.

- BATT LOW ················ Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared automatically

after the battery voltage increases to approx. 23.5V.

- BATT breaker OFF ····· Turn the BATT breaker on.

- Over voltage ············· Turn off the AC and BATT breakers until the battery

voltage returns to the normal condition.

- High temperature ······· The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until the

temperature returns to the normal condition (60℃ or

lower) automatically

- Over discharge ·········· When the BATT breaker trips, turn on the breakers in

the order of AC and BATT so that the charge operation

is restarted.

Note

Options Operation

10-5

10.3 Printer (NKG-91)

CAUTION

The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do

not touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure that the thermal head

is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head.

The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following

precautions when using this paper.

・ Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources.

・

Do not rub the paper with any hard objects.

・

Do not place the paper near organic solvents.

・

Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film,

erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time.

・

Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy

paper.

■ Loading the printer paper ■

1

1.

.

Press the paper cover open button.

The paper cover will open.

2

2.

.

Insert the paper as shown in the diagram at

right.

Position the paper such that the leading edge

extends outside the printer, and press both

sides of the paper cover to close it.

The printer will be turned on and off simultaneously with the equipment.

1

2

3

1. Paper cover open button

2. Paper cutter

3. Paper cover

Note

Options Operation

10-6

10.4 Printer (NKG-800)

CAUTION

The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do

not touch the print head of the printer. Make sure that the print head is cool

before replacing the paper or cleaning the print head.

Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper.

Do not twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge.

Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the

printer. Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it

back on again so it can initialize correctly.

The following shows the functions of the operation panel.

P.PARK FF LF NLQ ONLINE

Paper Park

Rewinds the roll

paper.

Feed Form

Feeds paper one

page at a time.

Line Feed

Feeds the paper

one line at a

time.

High-quality

Printing

Switches the

printer to the

high-quality

printing mode.

Printer Ready

Setting

The printer is

ready for

printing when

the lamp is lit.

Note 1: Before performing P.PARK/FF/LF/NLQ, press ONLINE to set the printer offline (lamp out).

Note 2: When the printer runs out of roll paper, the P.OUT lamp lights and the printer

automatically goes offline.

Platen

Paper is fed in contact

with this platen when the

friction lever is pushed

towards the back.

Power switch

Operation

panel

Roll paper cover

Roll support cover

Prevents printed roll paper

from being wound back in. Roll paper Roll paper stand

Roll bar

Passes through

the printing roll

paper.

Roll paper cutter

Paper feed knob

Friction lever

When replacing the roll paper,

pull this lever towards the front

before inserting the paper, and

return it towards the back after

paper is inserted.

Printer cover

Print head

Contacts the roll

p

a

p

er for

p

rintin

g

.

Options Operation

10-7

■ Loading the printer paper ■

1

1.

.

Turn the printer OFF, loosen the roll paper

stand fixing screws, and slide the stand

backwards to open the printer cover.

At this step, also remove the roll paper cover.

2

2.

.

Pass the roll bar through the roll paper,

and install the roll paper onto the roll paper

stand paying attention to its orientation.

3

3.

.

Pass the roll paper over the guide bar as

shown in the figure at right.

4

4.

.

Pull the friction lever towards the front, and

insert the leading edge of the paper into

the rear of the platen. Then, return the

friction lever to the back, and turn the

paper feed knob to feed the paper out.

5

5.

.

Lift the paper load lever up to hold down

paper fed out of the platen.

Fixing

screws

Roll bar

Roll paper

Guide bar

Platen

Paper

load lever

Options Operation

10-8

6

6.

.

Return the roll paper cover to its original

position, and place the roll support cover

as shown in the figure at right.

7

7.

.

Close the printer cover, return the roll

paper stand to its original position, and

tighten the fixing screws.

To perform a print test, turn the printer on with the LF key held down.

To end the print test, turn the printer off.

■ Replacing the ink ribbon ■

1

1.

.

Turn the printer on, and following the same

procedure as that in the previous section,

open the printer cover, lift up the ink ribbon

cartridge by holding the projection on the

cartridge, and lift the cartridge up to

remove it.

2

2.

.

Using the knob on the new cartridge to make

the ribbon taut, manually move the print

head to the left edge, and attach the ribbon

so that it is between the ribbon mask and

print head.

3

3.

.

Close the printer cover, return the roll paper

stand to its original position, and tighten the

fixing screws.

For other details, check the NKG-800 Installation Guide. The printer's operation

mode can be set by the DIP switches. However, leave the DIP switch settings at

their factory defaults (all off) when using the printer connected to the equipment.

Roll support

cover

Roll paper

cover

Projection

Ink ribbon

cartridge

Print head

Knob

Ink ribbon

cartridge

Note

Options Operation

10-9

10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit

The JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF radio equipment can be connected to external selective

calling devices for fishing boats (Selcall) to send signals for calling Selcall buoys or

Selcall receivers on ships.

For details on operations of the Selcall device, refer to the manuals of that device.

■ Procedure ■

1

1.

.

Finish all menu operations to return the

screen to the status display.

When a transmission is made from the

Selcall device while menus are displayed,

menus can no longer be operated until

transmission ends.

2

2.

.

Set the communication mode to TEL and

the assigned frequency (e.g. 2331.5 kHz)

for transmitting on the Selcall device in

the free frequency input mode. Then tune

the antenna by pressing key.

In this case, input both the Rx and Tx

frequencies as simplex frequencies.

3

3.

.

Operate the Selcall device to start

transmission.

When transmission is started, the

communications mode automatically

changes to H2B as shown at right.

4

4.

.

When transmission ends, the

communications mode returns to the

original mode.

Note

ANT

TUNE

TEL ITU- 401

4357.0

4065.0

RX kHz

TX kHz

NonDST: +

DROBOS: +

EdtDST: +

ID 431001234 23:59(UTC)

Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N

179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59 (EXT)

SIG

WKR scan bands:

2 4 6 8 12 16MHz

Options Operation

10-10

Appendix

11-1

11. Appendix

This section lists frequencies used for DSC such as frequencies used for routine calls

and frequencies used for safety and distress calls. It also lists the channel list of ITU

frequencies built-in to this equipment and the instructions for operating the MF/HF radio

equipment.

11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls

The following is a list of international1 transmission frequencies (all simplex) used by coast and

ship stations for distress and safety purposes either with DSC, radiotelephone or telex. CH No.

indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment.

（DSC）

（radiotelephone）（telex）

CH No. TRx（kHz） CH No. TRx（kHz）CH No. TRx（kHz）

--- 2187.5 --- 2182.0 --- 2174.5

401 4207.5 --- 4125.0 411 4177.5

601 6312.0 --- 6215.0 611 6268.0

801 8414.5 833 8291.0 801 8376.5

1201 12577.0 --- 12290.0 1287 12520.0

1601 16804.5 --- 16420.0 1624 16695.0

- When making DSC calls, the frequencies above can only be used if the

message category is Distress, Urgency, or Safety.

- The DSC frequencies listed above are watched by the DSC watch keeping

receiver.

- The radiotelephone frequencies other than 8291.0 kHz are the same as the

transmission frequencies of ITU channels 421, 606, 1221 and 1621. However,

when making calls for distress and safety purposes, use these frequencies2 as

simplex channels.

1 RR Appendix 15

2 RR Article 52.221.3

Note

Appendix

11-2

11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls

When ship and coast stations call national stations for purposes that are not safety or distress

purposes, normally use the national frequencies allocated by the administrator prior to using the

international frequencies listed later.3 The frequencies for Japan are as follows. Additionally, the

pair frequencies are used to make a call to the coast station.

Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz)

2169.0 8391.5 8431.5 18872.0 19682.5

4180.5 4218.0 12521.0 12623.0 22318.0 22410.0

6275.5 6326.5 16721.0 16844.0 25175.0 26103.0

11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls

The following international4 frequencies are used when calling ship and coast stations via DSC if

the other station's nationality or the frequency they are watching is not know, except for safety or

distress calls. CH No. indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment.

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz)

--- 2189.5 2177.0

1602 16805.0 16903.0

402 4208.0 4219.5 1603 16805.5 16903.5

403 4208.5 4220.0 1604 16806.0 16904.0

404 4209.0 4220.5

1801 18898.5 19703.5

602 6312.5 6331.0 1802 18899.0 19704.0

603 6313.0 6331.5 1803 18899.5 19704.5

604 6313.5 6332.0

2201 22374.5 22444.0

802 8415.0 8436.5 2202 22375.0 22444.5

803 8415.5 8437.0 2203 22375.5 22445.0

804 8416.0 8437.5

2501 25208.5 26121.0

1202 12577.5 12657.0 2502 25209.0 26121.5

1203 12578.0 12657.5 2503 25209.5 26122.0

1204 12578.5 12658.0

- The above frequencies can only be used when the DSC message category is

Routine.

- The above table lists the sending and receiving frequencies (duplex) when a

ship station calls a coast station.

- Normally routine calls between ship stations use 2177.0 kHz (simplex) as first

choice frequency.

- Channels not listed in the table above (401/601/801/1201/1601) are the

frequencies listed earlier for distress and safety purposes.

- In the table above, channels 402/602/802/1202/1602/1801/2201/2501 should

be selected first when making routine DSC calls on international frequencies.5

3 ITU-R M.541-9 Annex 3 4.1.2

4 RR Appendix 15

5 RR Appendix 17 part A footnote l

Note

Appendix

11-3

11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)

This section lists the channels preprogrammed into this equipment as TEL, CW and TLX ITU

frequencies.

(1) Radiotelephone mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17)

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

401 4065.0 4357.0

402 4068.0 4360.0

403 4071.0 4363.0

404 4074.0 4366.0

405 4077.0 4369.0

406 4080.0 4372.0

407 4083.0 4375.0

408 4086.0 4378.0

409 4089.0 4381.0

410 4092.0 4384.0

411 4095.0 4387.0

412 4098.0 4390.0

413 4101.0 4393.0

414 4104.0 4396.0

415 4107.0 4399.0

416 4110.0 4402.0

417 4113.0 4405.0

418 4116.0 4408.0

419 4119.0 4411.0

420 4122.0 4414.0

421 4125.0 4417.0 (*1)(*2)

422 4128.0 4420.0

423 4131.0 4423.0

424 4134.0 4426.0

425 4137.0 4429.0

426 4140.0 4432.0

427 4143.0 4435.0

428 4146.0 4146.0 Simplex(*4)

429 4149.0 4149.0 Simplex(*5)

601 6200.0 6501.0

602 6203.0 6504.0

603 6206.0 6507.0

604 6209.0 6510.0

605 6212.0 6513.0

606 6215.0 6516.0 (*1)(*2)

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

607 6218.0 6519.0

608 6221.0 6522.0

609 6224.0 6224.0 Simplex(*3)

610 6227.0 6227.0 Simplex(*3)

611 6230.0 6230.0 Simplex(*3)

801 8195.0 8719.0

802 8198.0 8722.0

803 8201.0 8725.0

804 8204.0 8728.0

805 8207.0 8731.0

806 8210.0 8734.0

807 8213.0 8737.0

808 8216.0 8740.0

809 8219.0 8743.0

810 8222.0 8746.0

811 8225.0 8749.0

812 8228.0 8752.0

813 8231.0 8755.0

814 8234.0 8758.0

815 8237.0 8761.0

816 8240.0 8764.0

817 8243.0 8767.0

818 8246.0 8770.0

819 8249.0 8773.0

820 8252.0 8776.0

821 8255.0 8779.0 (*2)

822 8258.0 8782.0

823 8261.0 8785.0

824 8264.0 8788.0

825 8267.0 8791.0

826 8270.0 8794.0

827 8273.0 8797.0

828 8276.0 8800.0

829 8279.0 8803.0

830 8282.0 8806.0

Appendix

11-4

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

831 8285.0 8809.0

832 8288.0 8812.0

833 8291.0 8291.0 Simplex(*1)

834 8294.0 8294.0 Simplex(*6)

835 8297.0 8297.0 Simplex(*7)

1201 12230.0 13077.0

1202 12233.0 13080.0

1203 12236.0 13083.0

1204 12239.0 13086.0

1205 12242.0 13089.0

1206 12245.0 13092.0

1207 12248.0 13095.0

1208 12251.0 13098.0

1209 12254.0 13101.0

1210 12257.0 13104.0

1211 12260.0 13107.0

1212 12263.0 13110.0

1213 12266.0 13113.0

1214 12269.0 13116.0

1215 12272.0 13119.0

1216 12275.0 13122.0

1217 12278.0 13125.0

1218 12281.0 13128.0

1219 12284.0 13131.0

1220 12287.0 13134.0

1221 12290.0 13137.0

(*1) (*8)

1222 12293.0 13140.0

1223 12296.0 13143.0

1224 12299.0 13146.0

1225 12302.0 13149.0

1226 12305.0 13152.0

1227 12308.0 13155.0

1228 12311.0 13158.0

1229 12314.0 13161.0

1230 12317.0 13164.0

1231 12320.0 13167.0

1232 12323.0 13170.0

1233 12326.0 13173.0

1234 12329.0 13176.0

1235 12332.0 13179.0

1236 12335.0 13182.0

1237 12338.0 13185.0

1238 12341.0 13188.0

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

1239 12344.0 13191.0

1240 12347.0 13194.0

1241 12350.0 13197.0

1242 12353.0 12353.0 Simplex(*3)

1243 12356.0 12356.0 Simplex(*3)

1244 12359.0 12359.0 Simplex(*2)

1245 12362.0 12362.0 Simplex(*3)

1246 12365.0 12365.0 Simplex(*3)

1601 16360.0 17242.0

1602 16363.0 17245.0

1603 16366.0 17248.0

1604 16369.0 17251.0

1605 16372.0 17254.0

1606 16375.0 17257.0

1607 16378.0 17260.0

1608 16381.0 17263.0

1609 16384.0 17266.0

1610 16387.0 17269.0

1611 16390.0 17272.0

1612 16393.0 17275.0

1613 16396.0 17278.0

1614 16399.0 17281.0

1615 16402.0 17284.0

1616 16405.0 17287.0

1617 16408.0 17290.0

1618 16411.0 17293.0

1619 16414.0 17296.0

1620 16417.0 17299.0

1621 16420.0 17302.0 (*1) (*9)

1622 16423.0 17305.0

1623 16426.0 17308.0

1624 16429.0 17311.0

1625 16432.0 17314.0

1626 16435.0 17317.0

1627 16438.0 17320.0

1628 16441.0 17323.0

1629 16444.0 17326.0

1630 16447.0 17329.0

1631 16450.0 17332.0

1632 16453.0 17335.0

1633 16456.0 17338.0

1634 16459.0 17341.0

1635 16462.0 17344.0

Appendix

11-5

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

1636 16465.0 17347.0

1637 16468.0 17350.0

1638 16471.0 17353.0

1639 16474.0 17356.0

1640 16477.0 17359.0

1641 16480.0 17362.0

1642 16483.0 17365.0

1643 16486.0 17368.0

1644 16489.0 17371.0

1645 16492.0 17374.0

1646 16495.0 17377.0

1647 16498.0 17380.0

1648 16501.0 17383.0

1649 16504.0 17386.0

1650 16507.0 17389.0

1651 16510.0 17392.0

1652 16513.0 17395.0

1653 16516.0 17398.0

1654 16519.0 17401.0

1655 16522.0 17404.0

1656 16525.0 17407.0

1657 16528.0 16528.0 Simplex(*3)

1658 16531.0 16531.0 Simplex(*3)

1659 16534.0 16534.0 Simplex(*3)

1660 16537.0 16537.0 Simplex(*2)

1661 16540.0 16540.0 Simplex(*3)

1662 16543.0 16543.0 Simplex(*3)

1663 16546.0 16546.0 Simplex(*3)

1801 18780.0 19755.0

1802 18783.0 19758.0

1803 18786.0 19761.0

1804 18789.0 19764.0

1805 18792.0 19767.0

1806 18795.0 19770.0 (*2)

1807 18798.0 19773.0

1808 18801.0 19776.0

1809 18804.0 19779.0

1810 18807.0 19782.0

1811 18810.0 19785.0

1812 18813.0 19788.0

1813 18816.0 19791.0

1814 18819.0 19794.0

1815 18822.0 19797.0

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

1816 18825.0 18825.0 Simplex(*3)

1817 18828.0 18828.0 Simplex(*3)

1818 18831.0 18831.0 Simplex(*3)

1819 18834.0 18834.0 Simplex(*3)

1820 18837.0 18837.0 Simplex(*3)

1821 18840.0 18840.0 Simplex(*3)

1822 18843.0 18843.0 Simplex(*3)

2201 22000.0 22696.0

2202 22003.0 22699.0

2203 22006.0 22702.0

2204 22009.0 22705.0

2205 22012.0 22708.0

2206 22015.0 22711.0

2207 22018.0 22714.0

2208 22021.0 22717.0

2209 22024.0 22720.0

2210 22027.0 22723.0

2211 22030.0 22726.0

2212 22033.0 22729.0

2213 22036.0 22732.0

2214 22039.0 22735.0

2215 22042.0 22738.0

2216 22045.0 22741.0

2217 22048.0 22744.0

2218 22051.0 22747.0

2219 22054.0 22750.0

2220 22057.0 22753.0

2221 22060.0 22756.0 (*2)

2222 22063.0 22759.0

2223 22066.0 22762.0

2224 22069.0 22765.0

2225 22072.0 22768.0

2226 22075.0 22771.0

2227 22078.0 22774.0

2228 22081.0 22777.0

2229 22084.0 22780.0

2230 22087.0 22783.0

2231 22090.0 22786.0

2232 22093.0 22789.0

2233 22096.0 22792.0

2234 22099.0 22795.0

2235 22102.0 22798.0

2236 22105.0 22801.0

Appendix

11-6

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

2237 22108.0 22804.0

2238 22111.0 22807.0

2239 22114.0 22810.0

2240 22117.0 22813.0

2241 22120.0 22816.0

2242 22123.0 22819.0

2243 22126.0 22822.0

2244 22129.0 22825.0

2245 22132.0 22828.0

2246 22135.0 22831.0

2247 22138.0 22834.0

2248 22141.0 22837.0

2249 22144.0 22840.0

2250 22147.0 22843.0

2251 22150.0 22846.0

2252 22153.0 22849.0

2253 22156.0 22852.0

2254 22159.0 22159.0 Simplex(*3)

2255 22162.0 22162.0 Simplex(*3)

2256 22165.0 22165.0 Simplex(*3)

2257 22168.0 22168.0 Simplex(*3)

CH No. Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

2258 22171.0 22171.0 Simplex(*3)

2259 22174.0 22174.0 Simplex(*3)

2260 22177.0 22177.0 Simplex(*3)

2501 25070.0 26145.0

2502 25073.0 26148.0

2503 25076.0 26151.0

2504 25079.0 26154.0

2505 25082.0 26157.0

2506 25085.0 26160.0

2507 25088.0 26163.0

2508 25091.0 26166.0

2509 25094.0 26169.0

2510 25097.0 26172.0 (*2)

2511 25100.0 25100.0 Simplex(*3)

2512 25103.0 25103.0 Simplex(*3)

2513 25106.0 25106.0 Simplex(*3)

2514 25109.0 25109.0 Simplex(*3)

2515 25112.0 25112.0 Simplex(*3)

2516 25115.0 25115.0 Simplex(*3)

2517 25118.0 25118.0 Simplex(*3)

*1) Used for distress and safety purposes (operates duplex channel as simplex).

*2) For calling.

*3) For inter-ship communications.

*4) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4351.0 kHz.

*5) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4354.0 kHz.

*6) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8707.0 kHz.

*7) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8710.0 kHz.

*8) From January 2004, calling on channel 1221 is prohibited.

*9) From January 2004, calling on channel 1621 is prohibited.

Appendix

11-7

(2) Additional usable frequencies in TEL mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17 / Sub Section C-1/ C-2)

Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

4000.0 4000.0 Simplex

4003.0 4003.0 Simplex

4006.0 4006.0 Simplex

4009.0 4009.0 Simplex

4012.0 4012.0 Simplex

4015.0 4015.0 Simplex

4018.0 4018.0 Simplex

4021.0 4021.0 Simplex

4024.0 4024.0 Simplex

4027.0 4027.0 Simplex

4030.0 4030.0 Simplex

4033.0 4033.0 Simplex

4036.0 4036.0 Simplex

4039.0 4039.0 Simplex

4042.0 4042.0 Simplex

4045.0 4045.0 Simplex

4048.0 4048.0 Simplex

4051.0 4051.0 Simplex

4054.0 4054.0 Simplex

4057.0 4057.0 Simplex

4060.0 4060.0 Simplex

8101.0 8101.0 Simplex

8104.0 8104.0 Simplex

8107.0 8107.0 Simplex

8110.0 8110.0 Simplex

8113.0 8113.0 Simplex

Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz) Remarks

8116.0 81160. Simplex

8119.0 8119.0 Simplex

8122.0 8122.0 Simplex

8125.0 8125.0 Simplex

8128.0 8128.0 Simplex

8131.0 8131.0 Simplex

8134.0 8134.0 Simplex

8137.0 8137.0 Simplex

8140.0 8140.0 Simplex

8143.0 8143.0 Simplex

8146.0 8146.0 Simplex

8149.0 8149.0 Simplex

8152.0 8152.0 Simplex

8155.0 8155.0 Simplex

8158.0 8158.0 Simplex

8161.0 8161.0 Simplex

8164.0 8164.0 Simplex

8167.0 8167.0 Simplex

8170.0 8170.0 Simplex

8173.0 8173.0 Simplex

8176.0 8176.0 Simplex

8179.0 8179.0 Simplex

8182.0 8182.0 Simplex

8185.0 8185.0 Simplex

8188.0 8188.0 Simplex

8191.0 8191.0 Simplex

Appendix

11-8

(3) CW mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17)

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

401 4182.0 Calling

402 4182.5 Calling

403 4184.0 Calling

404 4184.5 Calling

405 4183.0 Calling

406 4183.5 Calling

407 4185.0 Calling

408 4185.5 Calling

409 4186.0 Calling

410 4186.5

411 4187.0

412 4187.5

413 4188.0

414 4188.5

415 4189.0

416 4189.5

417 4190.0

418 4190.5

419 4191.0

420 4191.5

421 4192.0

422 4192.5

423 4193.0

424 4193.5

425 4194.0

426 4194.5

427 4195.0

428 4195.5

429 4196.0

430 4196.5

431 4197.0

432 4197.5

433 4198.0

434 4198.5

435 4199.0

436 4199.5

437 4200.0

438 4200.5

439 4201.0

440 4201.5

441 4202.0

601 6277.0 Calling

602 6277.5 Calling

603 6276.0 Calling

604 6276.5 Calling

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

605 6278.0 Calling

606 6278.5 Calling

607 6279.0 Calling

608 6279.5 Calling

609 6280.0 Calling

610 6280.5 Calling

611 6285.0

612 6285.5

613 6286.0

614 6286.5

615 6287.0

616 6287.5

617 6288.0

618 6288.5

619 6289.0

620 6289.5

621 6290.0

622 6290.5

623 6291.0

624 6291.5

625 6292.0

626 6292.5

627 6293.0

628 6293.5

629 6294.0

630 6294.5

631 6295.0

632 6295.5

633 6296.0

634 6296.5

635 6297.0

636 6297.5

637 6298.0

638 6298.5

639 6299.0

640 6299.5

641 6300.0

801 8366.0 Calling

802 8366.5 Calling

803 8368.0 Calling

804 8369.0 Calling

805 8367.0 Calling

806 8367.5 Calling

807 8368.5 Calling

808 8369.5 Calling

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

809 8370.0 Calling

810 8370.5 Calling

811 8342.0

812 8342.5

813 8343.0

814 8343.5

815 8344.0

816 8344.5

817 8345.0

818 8345.5

819 8346.0

820 8346.5

821 8347.0

822 8347.5

823 8348.0

824 8348.5

825 8349.0

826 8349.5

827 8350.0

828 8350.5

829 8351.0

830 8351.5

831 8352.0

832 8352.5

833 8353.0

834 8353.5

835 8354.0

836 8354.5

837 8355.0

838 8355.5

839 8356.0

840 8356.5

841 8357.0

842 8357.5

843 8358.0

844 8358.5

845 8359.0

846 8359.5

847 8360.0

848 8360.5

849 8361.0

850 8361.5

851 8362.0

852 8362.5

853 8363.0

854 8363.5

Appendix

11-9

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

855 8364.0

856 8364.5

857 8365.0

858 8365.5

859 8371.0

860 8371.5

861 8372.0

862 8372.5

863 8373.0

864 8373.5

865 8374.0

866 8374.5

867 8375.0

868 8375.5

869 8376.0

1201 12550.0 Calling

1202 12550.5 Calling

1203 12552.0 Calling

1204 12553.5 Calling

1205 12551.0 Calling

1206 12551.5 Calling

1207 12552.5 Calling

1208 12553.0 Calling

1209 12554.0 Calling

1210 12554.5 Calling

1211 12422.0

1212 12422.5

1213 12423.0

1214 12423.5

1215 12424.0

1216 12424.5

1217 12425.0

1218 12425.5

1219 12426.0

1220 12426.5

1221 12427.0

1222 12427.5

1223 12428.0

1224 12428.5

1225 12429.0

1226 12429.5

1227 12430.0

1228 12430.5

1229 12431.0

1230 12431.5

1231 12432.0

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

1232 12432.5

1233 12433.0

1234 12433.5

1235 12434.0

1236 12434.5

1237 12435.0

1238 12435.5

1239 12436.0

1240 12436.5

1241 12437.0

1242 12437.5

1243 12438.0

1244 12438.5

1245 12439.0

1246 12439.5

1247 12440.0

1248 12440.5

1249 12441.0

1250 12441.5

1251 12442.0

1252 12442.5

1253 12443.0

1254 12443.5

1255 12444.0

1256 12444.5

1257 12445.0

1258 12445.5

1259 12446.0

1260 12446.5

1261 12447.0

1262 12447.5

1263 12448.0

1264 12448.5

1265 12449.0

1266 12449.5

1267 12450.0

1268 12450.5

1269 12451.0

1270 12451.5

1271 12452.0

1272 12452.5

1273 12453.0

1274 12453.5

1275 12454.0

1276 12454.5

1277 12455.0

1278 12455.5

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

1279 12456.0

1280 12456.5

1281 12457.0

1282 12457.5

1283 12458.0

1284 12458.5

1285 12459.0

1286 12459.5

1287 12460.0

1288 12460.5

1289 12461.0

1290 12461.5

1291 12462.0

1292 12462.5

1293 12463.0

1294 12463.5

1295 12464.0

1296 12464.5

1297 12465.0

1298 12465.5

1299 12466.0

12100 12466.5

12101 12467.0

12102 12467.5

12103 12468.0

12104 12468.5

12105 12469.0

12106 12469.5

12107 12470.0

12108 12470.5

12109 12471.0

12110 12471.5

12111 12472.0

12112 12472.5

12113 12473.0

12114 12473.5

12115 12474.0

12116 12474.5

12117 12475.0

12118 12475.5

12119 12476.0

12120 12476.5

1601 16734.0 Calling

1602 16734.5 Calling

1603 16736.0 Calling

1604 16738.0 Calling

Appendix

11-10

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

1605 16735.0 Calling

1606 16735.5 Calling

1607 16736.5 Calling

1608 16737.0 Calling

1609 16737.5 Calling

1610 16738.5 Calling

1611 16619.0

1612 16619.5

1613 16620.0

1614 16620.5

1615 16621.0

1616 16621.5

1617 16622.0

1618 16622.5

1619 16623.0

1620 16623.5

1621 16624.0

1622 16624.5

1623 16625.0

1624 16625.5

1625 16626.0

1626 16626.5

1627 16627.0

1628 16627.5

1629 16628.0

1630 16628.5

1631 16629.0

1632 16629.5

1633 16630.0

1634 16630.5

1635 16631.0

1636 16631.5

1637 16632.0

1638 16632.5

1639 16633.0

1640 16633.5

1641 16634.0

1642 16634.5

1643 16635.0

1644 16635.5

1645 16636.0

1646 16636.5

1647 16637.0

1648 16637.5

1649 16638.0

1650 16638.5

1651 16639.0

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

1652 16639.5

1653 16640.0

1654 16640.5

1655 16641.0

1656 16641.5

1657 16642.0

1658 16642.5

1659 16643.0

1660 16643.5

1661 16644.0

1662 16644.5

1663 16645.0

1664 16645.5

1665 16646.0

1666 16646.5

1667 16647.0

1668 16647.5

1669 16648.0

1670 16648.5

1671 16649.0

1672 16649.5

1673 16650.0

1674 16650.5

1675 16651.0

1676 16651.5

1677 16652.0

1678 16652.5

1679 16653.0

1680 16653.5

1681 16654.0

1682 16654.5

1683 16655.0

1684 16655.5

1685 16656.0

1686 16656.5

1687 16657.0

1688 16657.5

1689 16658.0

1690 16658.5

1691 16659.0

1692 16659.5

1693 16660.0

1694 16660.5

1695 16661.0

1696 16661.5

1697 16662.0

1698 16662.5

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

1699 16663.0

16100 16663.5

16101 16664.0

16102 16664.5

16103 16665.0

16104 16665.5

16105 16666.0

16106 16666.5

16107 16667.0

16108 16667.5

16109 16668.0

16110 16668.5

16111 16669.0

16112 16669.5

16113 16670.0

16114 16670.5

16115 16671.0

16116 16671.5

16117 16672.0

16118 16672.5

16119 16673.0

16120 16673.5

16121 16674.0

16122 16674.5

16123 16675.0

16124 16675.5

16125 16676.0

16126 16676.5

16127 16677.0

16128 16677.5

16129 16678.0

16130 16678.5

16131 16679.0

16132 16679.5

16133 16680.0

16134 16680.5

16135 16681.0

16136 16681.5

16137 16682.0

16138 16682.5

16139 16683.0

2201 22279.5 Calling

2202 22280.0 Calling

2203 22280.5 Calling

2204 22281.0 Calling

2205 22281.5 Calling

Appendix

11-11

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

2206 22282.0 Calling

2207 22282.5 Calling

2208 22283.0 Calling

2209 22283.5 Calling

2210 22284.0 Calling

2211 22242.0

2212 22242.5

2213 22243.0

2214 22243.5

2215 22244.0

2216 22244.5

2217 22245.0

2218 22245.5

2219 22246.0

2220 22246.5

2221 22247.0

2222 22247.5

2223 22248.0

2224 22248.5

2225 22249.0

2226 22249.5

2227 22250.0

2228 22250.5

2229 22251.0

2230 22251.5

2231 22252.0

2232 22252.5

2233 22253.0

2234 22253.5

2235 22254.0

2236 22254.5

2237 22255.0

2238 22255.5

2239 22256.0

2240 22256.5

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

2241 22257.0

2242 22257.5

2243 22258.0

2244 22258.5

2245 22259.0

2246 22259.5

2247 22260.0

2248 22260.5

2249 22261.0

2250 22261.5

2251 22262.0

2252 22262.5

2253 22263.0

2254 22263.5

2255 22264.0

2256 22264.5

2257 22265.0

2258 22265.5

2259 22266.0

2260 22266.5

2261 22267.0

2262 22267.5

2263 22268.0

2264 22268.5

2265 22269.0

2266 22269.5

2267 22270.0

2268 22270.5

2269 22271.0

2270 22271.5

2271 22272.0

2272 22272.5

2273 22273.0

2274 22273.5

2275 22274.0

CH No. TRx (kHz) Remarks

2276 22274.5

2277 22275.0

2278 22275.5

2279 22276.0

2280 22276.5

2281 22277.0

2282 22277.5

2283 22278.0

2284 22278.5

2285 22279.0

2501 25171.5 Calling

2502 25172.0 Calling

2503 25171.5 Calling

2504 25172.5 Calling

2505 25161.5

2506 25162.0

2507 25162.5

2508 25163.0

2509 25163.5

2510 25164.0

2511 25164.5

2512 25165.0

2513 25165.5

2514 25166.0

2515 25166.5

2516 25167.0

2517 25167.5

2518 25168.0

2519 25168.5

2520 25169.0

2521 25169.5

2522 25170.0

2523 25170.5

2524 25171.0

Appendix

11-12

(4) Telex mode（ITU-RR Appendix 17）

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

401 4172.5 4210.5

402 4173.0 4211.0

403 4173.5 4211.5

404 4174.0 4212.0

405 4174.5 4212.5

406 4175.0 4213.0

407 4175.5 4213.5

408 4176.0 4214.0

409 4176.5 4214.5

410 4177.0 4215.0

411 4177.5 4177.5 Simplex(*1)

412 4178.0 4215.5

413 4178.5 4216.0

414 4179.0 4216.5

415 4179.5 4217.0

416 4180.0 4217.5

417 4180.5 4218.0

418 4181.0 4218.5

419 4181.5 4219.0

420 4202.5 4202.5 Simplex

421 4203.0 4203.0 Simplex

422 4203.5 4203.5 Simplex

423 4204.0 4204.0 Simplex

424 4204.5 4204.5 Simplex

425 4205.0 4205.0 Simplex

426 4205.5 4205.5 Simplex

427 4206.0 4206.0 Simplex

428 4206.5 4206.5 Simplex

429 4207.0 4207.0 Simplex

601 6263.0 6314.5

602 6263.5 6315.0

603 6264.0 6315.5

604 6264.5 6316.0

605 6265.0 6316.5

606 6265.5 6317.0

607 6266.0 6317.5

608 6266.5 6318.0

609 6267.0 6318.5

610 6267.5 6319.0

611 6268.0 6268.0 Simplex(*1)

612 6268.5 6319.5

613 6269.0 6320.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

614 6269.5 6320.5

615 6270.0 6321.0

616 6270.5 6321.5

617 6271.0 6322.0

618 6271.5 6322.5

619 6272.0 6323.0

620 6272.5 6323.5

621 6273.0 6324.0

622 6273.5 6324.5

623 6274.0 6325.0

624 6274.5 6325.5

625 6275.0 6326.0

626 6275.5 6326.5

627 6281.0 6327.0

628 6281.5 6327.5

629 6282.0 6328.0

630 6282.5 6328.5

631 6283.0 6329.0

632 6283.5 6329.5

633 6284.0 6330.0

634 6284.5 6330.5

635 6300.5 6300.5 Simplex

636 6301.0 6301.0 Simplex

637 6301.5 6301.5 Simplex

638 6302.0 6302.0 Simplex

639 6302.5 6302.5 Simplex

640 6303.0 6303.0 Simplex

641 6303.5 6303.5 Simplex

642 6304.0 6304.0 Simplex

643 6304.5 6304.5 Simplex

644 6305.0 6305.0 Simplex

645 6305.5 6305.5 Simplex

646 6306.0 6306.0 Simplex

647 6306.5 6306.5 Simplex

648 6307.0 6307.0 Simplex

649 6307.5 6307.5 Simplex

650 6308.0 6308.0 Simplex

651 6308.5 6308.5 Simplex

652 6309.0 6309.0 Simplex

653 6309.5 6309.5 Simplex

654 6310.0 6310.0 Simplex

655 6310.5 6310.5 Simplex

656 6311.0 6311.0 Simplex

Appendix

11-13

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

657 6311.5 6311.5 Simplex

801 8376.5 8376.5 Simplex(*1)

802 8377.0 8417.0

803 8377.5 8417.5

804 8378.0 8418.0

805 8378.5 8418.5

806 8379.0 8419.0

807 8379.5 8419.5

808 8380.0 8420.0

809 8380.5 8420.5

810 8381.0 8421.0

811 8381.5 8421.5

812 8382.0 8422.0

813 8382.5 8422.5

814 8383.0 8423.0

815 8383.5 8423.5

816 8384.0 8424.0

817 8384.5 8424.5

818 8385.0 8425.0

819 8385.5 8425.5

820 8386.0 8426.0

821 8386.5 8426.5

822 8387.0 8427.0

823 8387.5 8427.5

824 8388.0 8428.0

825 8388.5 8428.5

826 8389.0 8429.0

827 8389.5 8429.5

828 8390.0 8430.0

829 8390.5 8430.5

830 8391.0 8431.0

831 8391.5 8431.5

832 8392.0 8432.0

833 8392.5 8432.5

834 8393.0 8433.0

835 8393.5 8433.5

836 8394.0 8434.0

837 8394.5 8434.5

838 8395.0 8435.0

839 8395.5 8435.5

840 8396.0 8436.0

841 8396.5 8396.5 Simplex

842 8397.0 8397.0 Simplex

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

843 8397.5 8397.5 Simplex

844 8398.0 8398.0 Simplex

845 8398.5 8398.5 Simplex

846 8399.0 8399.0 Simplex

847 8399.5 8399.5 Simplex

848 8400.0 8400.0 Simplex

849 8400.5 8400.5 Simplex

850 8401.0 8401.0 Simplex

851 8401.5 8401.5 Simplex

852 8402.0 8402.0 Simplex

853 8402.5 8402.5 Simplex

854 8403.0 8403.0 Simplex

855 8403.5 8403.5 Simplex

856 8404.0 8404.0 Simplex

857 8404.5 8404.5 Simplex

858 8405.0 8405.0 Simplex

859 8405.5 8405.5 Simplex

860 8406.0 8406.0 Simplex

861 8406.5 8406.5 Simplex

862 8407.0 8407.0 Simplex

863 8407.5 8407.5 Simplex

864 8408.0 8408.0 Simplex

865 8408.5 8408.5 Simplex

866 8409.0 8409.0 Simplex

867 8409.5 8409.5 Simplex

868 8410.0 8410.0 Simplex

869 8410.5 8410.5 Simplex

870 8411.0 8411.0 Simplex

871 8411.5 8411.5 Simplex

872 8412.0 8412.0 Simplex

873 8412.5 8412.5 Simplex

874 8413.0 8413.0 Simplex

875 8413.5 8413.5 Simplex

876 8414.0 8414.0 Simplex

1201 12477.0 12579.5

1202 12477.5 12580.0

1203 12478.0 12580.5

1204 12478.5 12581.0

1205 12479.0 12581.5

1206 12479.5 12582.0

1207 12480.0 12582.5

1208 12480.5 12583.0

1209 12481.0 12583.5

Appendix

11-14

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1210 12481.5 12584.0

1211 12482.0 12584.5

1212 12482.5 12585.0

1213 12483.0 12585.5

1214 12483.5 12586.0

1215 12484.0 12586.5

1216 12484.5 12587.0

1217 12485.0 12587.5

1218 12485.5 12588.0

1219 12486.0 12588.5

1220 12486.5 12589.0

1221 12487.0 12589.5

1222 12487.5 12590.0

1223 12488.0 12590.5

1224 12488.5 12591.0

1225 12489.0 12591.5

1226 12489.5 12592.0

1227 12490.0 12592.5

1228 12490.5 12593.0

1229 12491.0 12593.5

1230 12491.5 12594.0

1231 12492.0 12594.5

1232 12492.5 12595.0

1233 12493.0 12595.5

1234 12493.5 12596.0

1235 12494.0 12596.5

1236 12494.5 12597.0

1237 12495.0 12597.5

1238 12495.5 12598.0

1239 12496.0 12598.5

1240 12496.5 12599.0

1241 12497.0 12599.5

1242 12497.5 12600.0

1243 12498.0 12600.5

1244 12498.5 12601.0

1245 12499.0 12601.5

1246 12499.5 12602.0

1247 12500.0 12602.5

1248 12500.5 12603.0

1249 12501.0 12603.5

1250 12501.5 12604.0

1251 12502.0 12604.5

1252 12502.5 12605.0

1253 12503.0 12605.5

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1254 12503.5 12606.0

1255 12504.0 12606.5

1256 12504.5 12607.0

1257 12505.0 12607.5

1258 12505.5 12608.0

1259 12506.0 12608.5

1260 12506.5 12609.0

1261 12507.0 12609.5

1262 12507.5 12610.0

1263 12508.0 12610.5

1264 12508.5 12611.0

1265 12509.0 12611.5

1266 12509.5 12612.0

1267 12510.0 12612.5

1268 12510.5 12613.0

1269 12511.0 12613.5

1270 12511.5 12614.0

1271 12512.0 12614.5

1272 12512.5 12615.0

1273 12513.0 12615.5

1274 12513.5 12616.0

1275 12514.0 12616.5

1276 12514.5 12617.0

1277 12515.0 12617.5

1278 12515.5 12618.0

1279 12516.0 12618.5

1280 12516.5 12619.0

1281 12517.0 12619.5

1282 12517.5 12620.0

1283 12518.0 12620.5

1284 12518.5 12621.0

1285 12519.0 12621.5

1286 12519.5 12622.0

1287 12520.0 12520.0 Simplex(*1)

1288 12520.5 12622.5

1289 12521.0 12623.0

1290 12521.5 12623.5

1291 12522.0 12624.0

1292 12522.5 12624.5

1293 12523.0 12625.0

1294 12523.5 12625.5

1295 12524.0 12626.0

1296 12524.5 12626.5

1297 12525.0 12627.0

Appendix

11-15

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1298 12525.5 12627.5

1299 12526.0 12628.0

12100 12526.5 12628.5

12101 12527.0 12629.0

12102 12527.5 12629.5

12103 12528.0 12630.0

12104 12528.5 12630.5

12105 12529.0 12631.0

12106 12529.5 12631.5

12107 12530.0 12632.0

12108 12530.5 12632.5

12109 12531.0 12633.0

12110 12531.5 12633.5

12111 12532.0 12634.0

12112 12532.5 12634.5

12113 12533.0 12635.0

12114 12533.5 12635.5

12115 12534.0 12636.0

12116 12534.5 12636.5

12117 12535.0 12637.0

12118 12535.5 12637.5

12119 12536.0 12638.0

12120 12536.5 12638.5

12121 12537.0 12639.0

12122 12537.5 12639.5

12123 12538.0 12640.0

12124 12538.5 12640.5

12125 12539.0 12641.0

12126 12539.5 12641.5

12127 12540.0 12642.0

12128 12540.5 12642.5

12129 21541.0 12643.0

12130 12541.5 12643.5

12131 12542.0 12644.0

12132 12542.5 12644.5

12133 12543.0 12645.0

12134 12543.5 12645.5

12135 12544.0 12646.0

12136 12544.5 12646.5

12137 12545.0 12647.0

12138 12545.5 12647.5

12139 12546.0 12648.0

12140 12546.5 12648.5

12141 12547.0 12649.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

12142 12547.5 12649.5

12143 12548.0 12650.0

12144 12548.5 12650.5

12145 12549.0 12651.0

12146 12549.5 12651.5

12147 12555.0 12652.0

12148 12555.5 12652.5

12149 12556.0 12653.0

12150 12556.5 12653.5

12151 12557.0 12654.0

12152 12557.5 12654.5

12153 12558.0 12655.0

12154 12558.5 12655.5

12155 12559.0 12656.0

12156 12559.5 12656.5

12157 12560.0 12560.0 Simplex

12158 12560.5 12560.5 Simplex

12159 12561.0 12561.0 Simplex

12160 21561.5 12561.5 Simplex

12161 12562.0 12562.0 Simplex

12162 12562.5 12562.5 Simplex

12163 12563.0 12563.0 Simplex

12164 12563.5 12563.5 Simplex

12165 12564.0 12564.0 Simplex

12166 12564.5 12564.5 Simplex

12167 12565.0 12565.0 Simplex

12168 12565.5 12565.5 Simplex

12169 12566.0 12566.0 Simplex

12170 12566.5 12566.5 Simplex

12171 12567.0 12567.0 Simplex

12172 12567.5 12567.5 Simplex

12173 12568.0 12568.0 Simplex

12174 12568.5 12568.5 Simplex

12175 12569.0 12569.0 Simplex

12176 12569.5 12569.5 Simplex

12177 12570.0 12570.0 Simplex

12178 12570.5 12570.5 Simplex

12179 12571.0 12571.0 Simplex

12180 12571.5 12571.5 Simplex

12181 12572.0 12572.0 Simplex

12182 12572.5 12572.5 Simplex

12183 12573.0 12573.0 Simplex

12184 12573.5 12573.5 Simplex

12185 12574.0 12574.0 Simplex

Appendix

11-16

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

12186 12574.5 12574.5 Simplex

12187 12575.0 12575.0 Simplex

12188 12575.5 12575.5 Simplex

12189 12576.0 12576.0 Simplex

12190 12576.5 12576.5 Simplex

1601 16683.5 16807.0

1602 16684.0 16807.5

1603 16684.5 16808.0

1604 16685.0 16808.5

1605 16685.5 16809.0

1606 16686.0 16809.5

1607 16686.5 16810.0

1608 16687.0 16810.5

1609 16687.5 16811.0

1610 16688.0 16811.5

1611 16688.5 16812.0

1612 16689.0 16812.5

1613 16689.5 16813.0

1614 16690.0 16813.5

1615 16690.5 16814.0

1616 16691.0 16814.5

1617 16691.5 16815.0

1618 16692.0 16815.5

1619 16692.5 16816.0

1620 16693.0 16816.5

1621 16693.5 16817.0

1622 16694.0 16817.5

1623 16694.5 16818.0

1624 16695.0 16695.0 Simplex(*1)

1625 16695.5 16818.5

1626 16696.0 16819.0

1627 16696.5 16819.5

1628 16697.0 16820.0

1629 16697.5 16820.5

1630 16698.0 16821.0

1631 16698.5 16821.5

1632 16699.0 16822.0

1633 16699.5 16822.5

1634 16700.0 16823.0

1635 16700.5 16823.5

1636 16701.0 16824.0

1637 16701.5 16824.5

1638 16702.0 16825.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1639 16702.5 16825.5

1640 16703.0 16826.0

1641 16703.5 16826.5

1642 16704.0 16827.0

1643 16704.5 16827.5

1644 16705.0 16828.0

1645 16705.5 16828.5

1646 16706.0 16829.0

1647 16706.5 16829.5

1648 16707.0 16830.0

1649 16707.5 16830.5

1650 16708.0 16831.0

1651 16708.5 16831.5

1652 16709.0 16832.0

1653 16709.5 16832.5

1654 16710.0 16833.0

1655 16710.5 16833.5

1656 16711.0 16834.0

1657 16711.5 16834.5

1658 16712.0 16835.0

1659 16712.5 16835.5

1660 16713.0 16836.0

1661 16713.5 16836.5

1662 16714.0 16837.0

1663 16714.5 16837.5

1664 16715.0 16838.0

1665 16715.5 16838.5

1666 16716.0 16839.0

1667 16716.5 16839.5

1668 16717.0 16840.0

1669 16717.5 16840.5

1670 16718.0 16841.0

1671 16718.5 16841.5

1672 16719.0 16842.0

1673 16719.5 16842.5

1674 16720.0 16843.0

1675 16720.5 16843.5

1676 16721.0 16844.0

1677 16721.5 16844.5

1678 16722.0 16845.0

1679 16722.5 16845.5

1680 16723.0 16846.0

1681 16723.5 16846.5

1682 16724.0 16847.0

Appendix

11-17

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1683 16724.5 16847.5

1684 16725.0 16848.0

1685 16725.5 16848.5

1686 16726.0 16849.0

1687 16726.5 16849.5

1688 16727.0 16850.0

1689 16727.5 16850.5

1690 16728.0 16851.0

1691 16728.5 16851.5

1692 16729.0 16852.0

1693 16729.5 16852.5

1694 16730.0 16853.0

1695 16730.5 16853.5

1696 16731.0 16854.0

1697 16731.5 16854.5

1698 16732.0 16855.0

1699 16732.5 16855.5

16100 16733.0 16856.0

16101 16733.5 16856.5

16102 16739.0 16857.0

16103 16739.5 16857.5

16104 16740.0 16858.0

16105 16740.5 16858.5

16106 16741.0 16859.0

16107 16741.5 16859.5

16108 16742.0 16860.0

16109 16742.5 16860.5

16110 16743.0 16861.0

16111 16743.5 16861.5

16112 16744.0 16862.0

16113 16744.5 16862.5

16114 16745.0 16863.0

16115 16745.5 16863.5

16116 16746.0 16864.0

16117 16746.5 16864.5

16118 16747.0 16865.0

16119 16747.5 16865.5

16120 16748.0 16866.0

16121 16748.5 16866.5

16122 16749.0 16867.0

16123 16749.5 16867.5

16124 16750.0 16868.0

16125 16750.5 16868.5

16126 16751.0 16869.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

16127 16751.5 16869.5

16128 16752.0 16870.0

16129 16752.5 16870.5

16130 16753.0 16871.0

16131 16753.5 16871.5

16132 16754.0 16872.0

16133 16754.5 16872.5

16134 16755.0 16873.0

16135 16755.5 16873.5

16136 16756.0 16874.0

16137 16756.5 16874.5

16138 16757.0 16875.0

16139 16757.5 16875.5

16140 16758.0 16876.0

16141 16758.5 16876.5

16142 16759.0 16877.0

16143 16759.5 16877.5

16144 16760.0 16878.0

16145 16760.5 16878.5

16146 16761.0 16879.0

16147 16761.5 16879.5

16148 16762.0 16880.0

16149 16762.5 16880.5

16150 16763.0 16881.0

16151 16763.5 16881.5

16152 16764.0 16882.0

16153 16764.5 16882.5

16154 16765.0 16883.0

16155 16765.5 16883.5

16156 16766.0 16884.0

16157 16766.5 16884.5

16158 16767.0 16885.0

16159 16767.5 16885.5

16160 16768.0 16886.0

16161 16768.5 16886.5

16162 16769.0 16887.0

16163 16769.5 16887.5

16164 16770.0 16888.0

16165 16770.5 16888.5

16166 16771.0 16889.0

16167 16771.5 16889.5

16168 16772.0 16890.0

16169 16772.5 16890.5

16170 16773.0 16891.0

Appendix

11-18

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

16171 16773.5 16891.5

16172 16774.0 16892.0

16173 16774.5 16892.5

16174 16775.0 16893.0

16175 16775.5 16893.5

16176 16776.0 16894.0

16177 16776.5 16894.5

16178 16777.0 16895.0

16179 16777.5 16895.5

16180 16778.0 16896.0

16181 16778.5 16896.5

16182 16779.0 16897.0

16183 16779.5 16897.5

16184 16780.0 16898.0

16185 16780.5 16898.5

16186 16781.0 16899.0

16187 16781.5 16899.5

16188 16782.0 16900.0

16189 16782.5 16900.5

16190 16783.0 16901.0

16191 16783.5 16901.5

16192 16784.0 16902.0

16193 16784.5 16902.5

16194 16785.0 16785.0 Simplex

16195 16785.5 16785.5 Simplex

16196 16786.0 16786.0 Simplex

16197 16786.5 16786.5 Simplex

16198 16787.0 16787.0 Simplex

16199 16787.5 16787.5 Simplex

16200 16788.0 16788.0 Simplex

16201 16788.5 16788.5 Simplex

16202 16789.0 16789.0 Simplex

16203 16789.5 16789.5 Simplex

16204 16790.0 16790.0 Simplex

16205 16790.5 16790.5 Simplex

16206 16791.0 16791.0 Simplex

16207 16791.5 16791.5 Simplex

16208 16792.0 16792.0 Simplex

16209 16792.5 16792.5 Simplex

16210 16793.0 16793.0 Simplex

16211 16793.5 16793.5 Simplex

16212 16794.0 16794.0 Simplex

16213 16794.5 16794.5 Simplex

16214 16795.0 16795.0 Simplex

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

16215 16795.5 16795.5 Simplex

16216 16796.0 16796.0 Simplex

16217 16796.5 16796.5 Simplex

16218 16797.0 16797.0 Simplex

16219 16797.5 16797.5 Simplex

16220 16798.0 16798.0 Simplex

16221 16798.5 16798.5 Simplex

16222 16799.0 16799.0 Simplex

16223 16799.5 16799.5 Simplex

16224 16800.0 16800.0 Simplex

16225 16800.5 16800.5 Simplex

16226 16801.0 16801.0 Simplex

16227 16801.5 16801.5 Simplex

16228 16802.0 16802.0 Simplex

16229 16802.5 16802.5 Simplex

16230 16803.0 16803.0 Simplex

16231 16803.5 16803.5 Simplex

16232 16804.0 16804.0 Simplex

1801 18870.5 19681.0

1802 18871.0 19681.5

1803 18871.5 19682.0

1804 18872.0 19682.5

1805 18872.5 19683.0

1806 18873.0 19683.5

1807 18873.5 19684.0

1808 18874.0 19684.5

1809 18874.5 19685.0

1810 18875.0 19685.5

1811 18875.5 19686.0

1812 18876.0 19686.5

1813 18876.5 19687.0

1814 18877.0 19687.5

1815 18877.5 19688.0

1816 18878.0 19688.5

1817 18878.5 19689.0

1818 18879.0 19689.5

1819 18879.5 19690.0

1820 18880.0 19690.5

1821 18880.5 19691.0

1822 18881.0 19691.5

1823 18881.5 19692.0

1824 18882.0 19692.5

1825 18882.5 19693.0

Appendix

11-19

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

1826 18883.0 19693.5

1827 18883.5 19694.0

1828 18884.0 19694.5

1829 18884.5 19695.0

1830 18885.0 19695.5

1831 18885.5 19696.0

1832 18886.0 19696.5

1833 18886.5 19697.0

1834 18887.0 19697.5

1835 18887.5 19698.0

1836 18888.0 19698.5

1837 18888.5 19699.0

1838 18889.0 19699.5

1839 18889.5 19700.0

1840 18890.0 19700.5

1841 18890.5 19701.0

1842 18891.0 19701.5

1843 18891.5 19702.0

1844 18892.0 19702.5

1845 18892.5 19703.0

1846 18893.0 18893.0 Simplex

1847 18893.5 18893.5 Simplex

1848 18894.0 18894.0 Simplex

1849 18894.5 18894.5 Simplex

1850 18895.0 18895.0 Simplex

1851 18895.5 18895.5 Simplex

1852 18896.0 18896.0 Simplex

1853 18896.5 18896.5 Simplex

1854 18897.0 18897.0 Simplex

1855 18897.5 18897.5 Simplex

1856 18898.0 18898.0 Simplex

2201 22284.5 22376.5

2202 22285.0 22377.0

2203 22285.5 22377.5

2204 22286.0 22378.0

2205 22286.5 22378.5

2206 22287.0 22379.0

2207 22287.5 22379.5

2208 22288.0 22380.0

2209 22288.5 22380.5

2210 22289.0 22381.0

2211 22289.5 22381.5

2212 22290.0 22382.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

2213 22290.5 22382.5

2214 22291.0 22383.0

2215 22291.5 22383.5

2216 22292.0 22384.0

2217 22292.5 22384.5

2218 22293.0 22385.0

2219 22293.5 22385.5

2220 22294.0 22386.0

2221 22294.5 22386.5

2222 22295.0 22387.0

2223 22295.5 22387.5

2224 22296.0 22388.0

2225 22296.5 22388.5

2226 22297.0 22389.0

2227 22297.5 22389.5

2228 22298.0 22390.0

2229 22298.5 22390.5

2230 22299.0 22391.0

2231 22299.5 22391.5

2232 22300.0 22392.0

2233 22300.5 22392.5

2234 22301.0 22393.0

2235 22301.5 22393.5

2236 22302.0 22394.0

2237 22302.5 22394.5

2238 22303.0 22395.0

2239 22303.5 22395.5

2240 22304.0 22396.0

2241 22304.5 22396.5

2242 22305.0 22397.0

2243 22305.5 22397.5

2244 22306.0 22398.0

2245 22306.5 22398.5

2246 22307.0 22399.0

2247 22307.5 22399.5

2248 22308.0 22400.0

2249 22308.5 22400.5

2250 22309.0 22401.0

2251 22309.5 22401.5

2252 22310.0 22402.0

2253 22310.5 22402.5

2254 22311.0 22403.0

2255 22311.5 22403.5

2256 22312.0 22404.0

Appendix

11-20

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

2257 22312.5 22404.5

2258 22313.0 22405.0

2259 22313.5 22405.5

2260 22314.0 22406.0

2261 22314.5 22406.5

2262 22315.0 22407.0

2263 22315.5 22407.5

2264 22316.0 22408.0

2265 22316.5 22408.5

2266 22317.0 22409.0

2267 22317.5 22409.5

2268 22318.0 22410.0

2269 22318.5 22410.5

2270 22319.0 22411.0

2271 22319.5 22411.5

2272 22320.0 22412.0

2273 22320.5 22412.5

2274 22321.0 22413.0

2275 22321.5 22413.5

2276 22322.0 22414.0

2277 22322.5 22414.5

2278 22323.0 22415.0

2279 22323.5 22415.5

2280 22324.0 22416.0

2281 22324.5 22416.5

2282 22325.0 22417.0

2283 22325.5 22417.5

2284 22326.0 22418.0

2285 22326.5 22418.5

2286 22327.0 22419.0

2287 22327.5 22419.5

2288 22328.0 22420.0

2289 22328.5 22420.5

2290 22329.0 22421.0

2291 22329.5 22421.5

2292 22330.0 22422.0

2293 22330.5 22422.5

2294 22331.0 22423.0

2295 22331.5 22423.5

2296 22332.0 22424.0

2297 22332.5 22424.5

2298 22333.0 22425.0

2299 22333.5 22425.5

22100 22334.0 22426.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

22101 22334.5 22426.5

22102 22335.0 22427.0

22103 22335.5 22427.5

22104 22336.0 22428.0

22105 22336.5 22428.5

22106 22337.0 22429.0

22107 22337.5 22429.5

22108 22338.0 22430.0

22109 22338.5 22430.5

22110 22339.0 22431.0

22111 22339.5 22431.5

22112 22340.0 22432.0

22113 22340.5 22432.5

22114 22341.0 22433.0

22115 22341.5 22433.5

22116 22342.0 22434.0

22117 22342.5 22434.5

22118 22343.0 22435.0

22119 22343.5 22435.5

22120 22344.0 22436.0

22121 22344.5 22436.5

22122 22345.0 22437.0

22123 22345.5 22437.5

22124 22346.0 22438.0

22125 22346.5 22438.5

22126 22347.0 22439.0

22127 22347.5 22439.5

22128 22348.0 22440.0

22129 22348.5 22440.5

22130 22349.0 22441.0

22131 22349.5 22441.5

22132 22350.0 22442.0

22133 22350.5 22442.5

22134 22351.0 22443.0

22135 22351.5 22443.5

22136 22352.0 22352.0 Simplex

22137 22352.5 22352.5 Simplex

22138 22353.0 22353.0 Simplex

22139 22353.5 22353.5 Simplex

22140 22354.0 22354.0 Simplex

22141 22354.5 22354.5 Simplex

22142 22355.0 22355.0 Simplex

22143 22355.5 22355.5 Simplex

22144 22356.0 22356.0 Simplex

Appendix

11-21

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

22145 22356.5 22356.5 Simplex

22146 22357.0 22357.0 Simplex

22147 22357.5 22357.5 Simplex

22148 22358.0 22358.0 Simplex

22149 22358.5 22358.5 Simplex

22150 22359.0 22359.0 Simplex

22151 22359.5 22359.5 Simplex

22152 22360.0 22360.0 Simplex

22153 22360.5 22360.5 Simplex

22154 22361.0 22361.0 Simplex

22155 22361.5 22361.5 Simplex

22156 22362.0 22362.0 Simplex

22157 22362.5 22362.5 Simplex

22158 22363.0 22363.0 Simplex

22159 22363.5 22363.5 Simplex

22160 22364.0 22364.0 Simplex

22161 22364.5 22364.5 Simplex

22162 22365.0 22365.0 Simplex

22163 22365.5 22365.5 Simplex

22164 22366.0 22366.0 Simplex

22165 22366.5 22366.5 Simplex

22166 22367.0 22367.0 Simplex

22167 22367.5 22367.5 Simplex

22168 22368.0 22368.0 Simplex

22169 22368.5 22368.5 Simplex

22170 22369.0 22369.0 Simplex

22171 22369.5 22369.5 Simplex

22172 22370.0 22370.0 Simplex

22173 22370.5 22370.5 Simplex

22174 22371.0 22371.0 Simplex

22175 22371.5 22371.5 Simplex

22176 22372.0 22372.0 Simplex

22177 22372.5 22372.5 Simplex

22178 22373.0 22373.0 Simplex

22179 22373.5 22373.5 Simplex

22180 22374.0 22374.0 Simplex

2501 25173.0 26101.0

2502 25173.5 26101.5

2503 25174.0 26102.0

2504 25174.5 26102.5

2505 25175.0 26103.0

2506 25175.5 26103.5

2507 25176.0 26104.0

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

2508 25176.5 26104.5

2509 25177.0 26105.0

2510 25177.5 26105.5

2511 25178.0 26106.0

2512 25178.5 26106.5

2513 25179.0 26107.0

2514 25179.5 26107.5

2515 25180.0 26108.0

2516 25180.5 26108.5

2517 25181.0 26109.0

2518 25181.5 26109.5

2519 25182.0 26110.0

2520 25182.5 26110.5

2521 25183.0 26111.0

2522 25183.5 26111.5

2523 25184.0 26112.0

2524 25184.5 26112.5

2525 25185.0 26113.0

2526 25185.5 26113.5

2527 25186.0 26114.0

2528 25186.5 26114.5

2529 25187.0 26115.0

2530 25187.5 26115.5

2531 25188.0 26116.0

2532 25188.5 26116.5

2533 25189.0 26117.0

2534 25189.5 26117.5

2535 25190.0 26118.0

2536 25190.5 26118.5

2537 25191.0 26119.0

2538 25191.5 26119.5

2539 25192.0 26120.0

2540 25192.5 26120.5

2541 25193.0 25193.0 Simplex

2542 25193.5 25193.5 Simplex

2543 25194.0 25194.0 Simplex

2544 25194.5 25194.5 Simplex

2545 25195.0 25195.0 Simplex

2546 25195.5 25195.5 Simplex

2547 25196.0 25196.0 Simplex

2548 25196.5 25196.5 Simplex

2549 25197.0 25197.0 Simplex

2550 25197.5 25197.5 Simplex

2551 25198.0 25198.0 Simplex

Appendix

11-22

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

2552 25198.5 25198.5 Simplex

2553 25199.0 25199.0 Simplex

2554 25199.5 25199.5 Simplex

2555 25200.0 25200.0 Simplex

2556 25200.5 25200.5 Simplex

2557 25201.0 25201.0 Simplex

2558 25201.5 25201.5 Simplex

2559 25202.0 25202.0 Simplex

2560 25202.5 25202.5 Simplex

2561 25203.0 25203.0 Simplex

CH No. Tx（kHz）Rx（kHz） Remarks

2562 25203.5 25203.5 Simplex

2563 25204.0 25204.0 Simplex

2564 25204.5 25204.5 Simplex

2565 25205.0 25205.0 Simplex

2566 25205.5 25205.5 Simplex

2567 25206.0 25206.0 Simplex

2568 25206.5 25206.5 Simplex

2569 25207.0 25207.0 Simplex

2570 25207.5 25207.5 Simplex

2571 25208.0 25208.0 Simplex

*1) Used for distress and safety purposes.

Appendix

11-23

11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation

Be aware of the following points when using the MF/HF radio equipment.

z Frequencies available for communication are always changing.

z Not all frequency bandwidths can always be used for communication.

z After sending the DSC test call to a coast station, you will not always receive the

acknowledgement.

1. About the MF/HF radio equipment

Although for ship MF/HF radio equipment the 1.6 MHz to 27.5 MHz frequencies are

normally available, select an appropriate frequency from the frequencies assigned to

your ship for communication. As noted below, the use of the appropriate frequency

depends upon the radio wave propagation characteristics of the ionosphere.

Therefore, not all frequency bands are available for communication even if the

equipment is functioning properly.

2. Special characteristics of MF/HF radio wave propagation

As shown in the figure to the right, the

major MF/HF radio waves used for

communications are terrestrial waves

(path 1) and waves reflected from the

ionosphere (paths 2 and 3). You can

communicate using waves reflected from

the ionosphere and the earth because

the effective communication range of

terrestrial waves is limited6.

The available range of frequencies for

communication depends upon the radio

wave propagation characteristics of the

ionosphere. They will also change dramatically depending on the position and

distance from the station, the season, the time, and the sunspot number (approx. 0 to

250) which changes every 11 years7.

3. Selecting communication frequencies

MF/HF band communication frequencies cannot be predetermined. However, you can

select frequencies referring to previous communications logs, the frequency transition

table in this chapter under "Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band

(reference)", and the radio wave propagation image.

4. About DSC testing

DSC operation is prescribed as an international standard8 of the ITU and coast

stations that receive DSC test calls should acknowledge the calls. Responses may be

sent manually instead of automatically depending on the equipment at the coast

station. It may take longer than expected to receive the acknowledgement even if

your equipment is functioning properly and you have selected the proper

frequency.

6 You may experience skip zones where both terrestrial waves and waves reflected from the

ionosphere are unavailable at the end of the effective communication range of terrestrial

waves.

7 Radio wave propagation is affected by phasing, the Dellinger phenomenon, magnetic storms,

and atmospherics. Interference tends to be greater at night when radio waves can travel

greater distances.

8 ITU-R Recommendation M. 541

無線局 A

23

無線局 B

1

電離層　 F1/F2層

電離層　 E層

電離層　 D層

地表

Ionosphere F1/F2 layer

Ionosphere E layer

Ionosphere D layer

Station A

Earth

Station B

Appendix

11-24

Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band (reference)

When communicating with the MF/HF radio equipment, select frequencies referring to the

frequency transition table and the radio wave propagation images (excluding the polar

latitudes) shown below9.

Example: When communicating with a station approximately 5000 km away at

around 12 pm in the winter with a sunspot number of 100, select

frequencies in the 18, 22, or 25 MHz bands for the best results.

¾ Frequency transition table

日中

夜間

冬

夏

冬

夏

遠距離

（例：5000km）

近距離

（例：1000km）

距離季節と時刻 2M 4M 6M 8M 12M 16M 18M 22M 25M

周波数選択の目安

（太陽の黒点数 = 100の場合）

通信条件

日中

夜間

日中

夜間

日中

夜間

Transmissions conditions

Distance Season & time

Day

Winter Night

Day

Long distances

(e.g. 5000 km)

Summer Night

Day

Winter Night

Day

Short distances

(e.g. 1000 km)

Summer Night

Guideline for selecting frequency (for a sunspot count of 100)

¾ Radio wave propagation images

9 These are based on the prediction of HF radio wave propagations. Communication is not

guaranteed.

7ZPJD0604

电子信息产品有害物资申明

Japan Radio Company Limited

电子信息产品有害物资申明

日本无线株式会社

Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements

of Electronic Information Products

名称

(Name)

: MF/HF Radio equipment

(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）

形式名

(Type)

: JSS 2250/2500

有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量

名称

(N

ame

)

:

MF/HF

R

a

di

o equ

i

pmen

t

铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚

(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+)(PBB) (PBDE)

天线

(Antenna) ×○××××

形式名

(T

ype

)

:

JSS

-

2250/2500

部件名称

(Part name)

(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)

有毒有害物质或元素

()

船内装置

(Inboard Unit) ×○××××

外部设备(Peripherals)

・选择(Options)

・打印机(Printer)

・电

线类

(

Cables

)

×○××××

电线类

(Cables)

・手册(Documennts)

○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。

(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in

SJ/T11363-2006.)

×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。

　　　(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above

　　　 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China

RE: 中华人民共和国电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

－ 1 / 1 －

- 1/1 -

Marking with market circulation mark

According to the requirements of clause 20 of Technical Regulations about safety of Maritime

transport objetcs, approved by Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment #620 dated

August 12, 2010 and requirements Technical Regulation of the Russian Federation Goverment

#623 dated August 12, 2010 navigation & radiotelephone equipment should be marked by

company – manufacturer with market-circulation mark the way it is determined by Legislation of

the Russia federation on technical regulation.

According to the airticle 27 PZ No184 –FZ of Federal Law about Technical Regulation dated

December 12, 2002 and Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment dated 19.11.03

No0696 navigation equipment has an appropriate marking. The marking can be perfomed by one

of four variants, depending on surface colour of equipment.

The images should be grey scale and should contrast against the surface colour (ref. to the

Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment No696 <<About market circulation mark>>

dated November 19, 2003).

The marking of Radio and navigational equipment should be done by the manufacturer (supplier)

according to the clause 2 of the article 27 of the Federal Law No.184 –FZ << About technical

Regulation>> and should be applied right to device surface.

Japan Radio JSS-2250 Marine MF/HF GMDSS Radio Transceiver, digital selective calling (DSC) / narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) Modem User Manual

Japan Radio Co Ltd. Marine MF/HF GMDSS Radio Transceiver, digital selective calling (DSC) / narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) Modem

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation